SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Contents 
Before driving 
Introduction 2 
Instrumentation 6 
Controls and features 18 
Seating and safety restraints 70 
Starting and driving 
Starting 100 
Driving 106 
Roadside emergencies 137 
Servicing 
Maintenance and care 158 
Capacities and specifications 209 
Customer assistance 218 
Reporting safety defects 230 
Index 231 
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including 
photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation 
in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. 
Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. 
Copyright © 1999 Ford Motor Company 
1
Introduction 
The following warning may be required by California law: 
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning 
Engine exhaust, some if its constituents, and certain vehicle 
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of 
California to cause cancer, or birth defects or other reproductive harm. 
ICONS 
Indicates a safety alert. Read the 
following section on Warnings. 
Indicates vehicle information related 
to recycling and other 
environmental concerns will follow. 
Correct vehicle usage and the 
authorized disposal of waste 
cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards 
protecting the environment. 
Indicates a message regarding child 
safety restraints. Refer to Seating 
and safety restraints for more 
information. 
Indicates that this Owner Guide 
contains information on this subject. 
Please refer to the Index to locate 
the appropriate section which will 
provide you more information. 
WARNINGS 
Warnings provide information which may reduce the risk of personal injury 
and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment. 
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE 
There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the 
first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is 
necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 
2
Introduction 
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE 
The information found in this guide was in effect at the time of printing. 
Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring 
obligation. 
SPECIAL NOTICES 
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. 
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, 
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an 
accident. 
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter as well as the 
“Four Wheeling” supplement included with 4WD and utility type vehicles. 
Using your vehicle as a snowplow 
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. 
Using your vehicle as an ambulance 
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. 
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation 
Package. 
Electric vehicles 
For information on operating your Electric Vehicle, also refer to the 
Electric Vehicle Owner’s Guide Supplement. 
3
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. 
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide 
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front 
Air Bag-Side Child Seat 
Child Seat Installation 
Warning 
Child Seat Tether 
Anchorage 
Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System 
Brake Fluid - 
Non-Petroleum Based 
Traction Control 
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher 
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment 
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe 
Windshield 
Defrost/Demist 
Rear Window 
Defrost/Demist 
Power Windows 
Front/Rear 
Power Window Lockout 
Introduction 
4
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Child Safety Door 
Lock/Unlock 
Interior Luggage 
Compartment Release 
Symbol 
Panic Alarm Engine Oil 
Engine Coolant 
Engine Coolant 
Temperature 
Do Not Open When Hot Battery 
Avoid Smoking, Flames, 
or Sparks 
Battery Acid 
Explosive Gas Fan Warning 
Power Steering Fluid 
Maintain Correct Fluid 
Level 
MAX 
MIN 
Emission System Engine Air Filter 
Passenger Compartment 
Air Filter 
Jack 
Introduction 
5
Instrumentation 
DIM 
OFF 
50 
40 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
F H H H 
SET 
ACC 
E L 
20 
100 
60 
80 100 
120 
BRAKE THEFT 
OFF COAST 
ON 
ABS 
SPEED 
CONT 
O/D 
OFF 
P R N D 2 1 
L L 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
DOOR 
AJAR 
<FUEL DOOR 
! 
Headlamp control 
(pg. 18) 
Instrument cluster 
(pg. 8) 
Instrument panel 
dimmer switch 
(pg. 19) 
Speed control* 
(pg. 55) 
Driver air bag 
(pg. 84) 
Turn signal and 
wiper/washer control 
(pg. 61) 
Parking brake release 
(pg. 108) 
6
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4wd control* 
(pg. 119) 
4X4 
LOW 
ST DX 
FM 
1 2 3 4 AM/FM 
OFF 
ON 
OFF 
OFF 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
TONE TONE VOL 
SEEK 
12 
CLK TUNE 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
Instrumentation 
Climate control system 
(pg. 19) 
Auxiliary power point 
(pg. 25) 
Electronic sound system 
(pg. 26) 
Passenger air bag 
deactivate switch 
(pg. 88) 
Fog lamp control * 
(pg. 18) 
Hood release 
(pg. 159) 
* if equipped 
7
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES 
Standard instrument cluster 
DOOR 
AJAR 
50 
60 70 
80 
0 0 0 
CHECK 
40 
ENGINE 
F H H H 
30 
20 
60 
80 100 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
20 180 
10 MPH 
100 
140 
160 
km/h 
E L 
P R N D 2 1 <FUEL DOOR 
ABS 
! 
BRAKE 
Optional instrument cluster 
L L 
90 
110 
120 
SPEED 
CONT 
O/D 
THEFT OFF 
C 
50 
60 70 
40 
80 
90 
0 0 0 
80 100 
120 
DOOR 
CHECK AJAR 
GAGE 
H H 
2 
1 
0 
3 
4 5 6 
RPMx1000 
ABS 
! 
BRAKE 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
FUEL 
RESET 
E 
F 
H 
30 
20 
60 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
20 180 
10 MPH 
100 
140 
160 
km/h 
110 
120 
P R N D 2 1 THEFT 
SPEED 
CONT 
4WD 
HIGH 
4WD 
LOW 
L 
O/D 
OFF 
L 
Check engine 
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
computer that monitors the engine’s 
CHECK 
emission control system. This 
system is commonly known as the 
ENGINE 
On Board Diagnostics System (OBD 
II). This OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your 
vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD II 
system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your 
vehicle. 
Instrumentation 
8
Instrumentation 
The Check Engine indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first 
turned to the ON position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the 
engine is started, one of the engine’s emission control systems may be 
malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern 
being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require 
towing. 
What you should do if the check engine light illuminates 
Light turns on solid: 
This means that the OBD II system has detected a malfunction. 
Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check Engine light to 
illuminate. Examples are: 
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run 
poorly.) 
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely 
tightened. 
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank 
with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly 
installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles 
without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the Check 
Engine light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine 
startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle 
service is required. 
If the Check Engine light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the 
first available opportunity. 
Light is blinking: 
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. 
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and 
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures 
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior 
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. 
9
Fuel reset (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the ignition key is 
turned to the ON position and the 
FUEL 
fuel pump shut-off switch has been 
triggered. For more information, 
RESET 
refer to Fuel pump shut-off switch 
in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 
Air bag readiness 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned ON. If the light 
fails to illuminate, continues to flash 
or remains on, have the system 
serviced immediately. 
Safety belt 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned to the ON position 
to remind you to fasten your safety 
belts. For more information, refer to 
the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
Brake system warning 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned to the ON 
! 
position. Also illuminates if the 
BRAKE 
parking brake is engaged. If the 
brake warning lamp does not 
illuminate at these times, seek service immediately. Illumination after 
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake 
system should be inspected immediately. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned to the ON 
ABS 
position. If the light remains on, 
continues to flash or fails to 
illuminate, have the system serviced 
immediately. With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is 
disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning 
light also remains illuminated with the parking brake released. 
Instrumentation 
10
Instrumentation 
Turn signal 
Illuminates when the left or right 
turn signal or the hazard lights are 
turned on. If one or both of the 
indicators stay on continuously or 
flash faster, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb. Refer to Exterior 
bulbs in the Maintenance and care chapter. 
High beams 
Illuminates when the high beam 
headlamps are turned on. 
Anti-theft system (if equipped) 
Refer to SecuriLocky passive 
anti-theft system in the Controls 
and features chapter. 
THEFT 
Charging system 
Illuminates when the ignition is 
turned to the ON position and the 
engine is off. The light also 
illuminates when the battery is not 
charging properly, requiring electrical system service. 
O/D off (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the Transmission 
O/D 
Control Switch (TCS), refer to 
Overdrive control in the Controls 
OFF 
and Features chapter, has been 
pushed turning the transmission overdrive function OFF. When the light 
is on, the transmission does not operate in the overdrive mode, refer to 
the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. 
The light may also flash steadily if a transmission malfunction is 
detected. If the light does not come on when the Transmission Control 
Switch is depressed or if the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle 
serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. 
11
Check gage (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the engine coolant 
temperature is high, the engine oil 
pressure is low or the fuel gauge is 
at or near empty. The ignition must 
be in the ON position for this lamp to illuminate. The lamp will also 
illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position. Refer to 
Engine coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or 
Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information. 
Four wheel drive low (if equipped) 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned to the START 
position. Illuminates when 
four-wheel drive low is engaged. If 
the light continues to flash have the system serviced. 
Four wheel drive high (if equipped) 
Momentarily illuminates when the 
ignition is turned to the START 
position. Illuminates when four-wheel 
drive high is engaged. If the 
light continues to flash have the system serviced. 
Door ajar 
Illuminates when the ignition is in 
the ON or START position and any 
door is open. 
CHECK 
GAGE 
4WD 
LOW 
4WD 
HIGH 
DOOR 
AJAR 
Speed control 
This light comes on when either the 
SET/ACCEL or RESUME controls 
SPEED 
are pressed. It turns off when the 
CONT 
speed control OFF control is 
pressed, the brake is applied or the ignition is turned to the OFF 
position. 
Instrumentation 
12
Instrumentation 
Safety belt warning chime 
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
For information on the safety belt warning chime, refer to the Seating 
and safety restraints chapter. 
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime 
For information on the SRS warning chime, refer to the Seating and 
safety restraints chapter. 
Key-in-ignition warning chime 
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACC 
position and the driver’s door is opened. 
Headlamps on warning chime 
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off 
(and the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened. 
13
GAUGES 
Standard instrument cluster gauges 
DOOR 
AJAR 
50 
40 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
F H H H 
E L 
ABS 
20 
60 
80 100 
Optional instrument cluster gauges 
2 
1 
20 
Fuel gauge 
Displays approximately how much 
fuel is in the fuel tank (when the 
key is in the ON position). The fuel 
gauge may vary slightly when the 
vehicle is in motion. The ignition 
should be in the OFF position while 
the vehicle is being refueled. When 
the gauge first indicates empty, 
there is a small amount of reserve 
fuel in the tank. When refueling the 
SPEED 
THEFT CONT 
O/D 
OFF 
120 
P R N D 2 1 
L L 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
100 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
<FUEL DOOR 
! 
BRAKE 
C 
0 
3 
4 5 6 
RPMx1000 
ABS 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
FUEL 
RESET 
E 
F 
50 
40 
80 100 
120 
H H 
H 
100 
60 
P R N D 2 1 THEFT 
SPEED 
CONT 
4WD 
HIGH 
4WD 
LOW 
O/D 
OFF 
L 
L 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
DOOR 
AJAR 
CHECK 
GAGE 
! 
BRAKE 
E 
F 
Instrumentation 
14
Instrumentation 
vehicle from empty indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will 
be less than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. 
The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the 
fuel filler door is located. 
Engine coolant temperature gauge 
Indicates the temperature of the 
engine coolant. At normal operating 
temperature, the needle remains 
within the normal area (the area 
between the “H” and “C”). If it 
enters the red section, the engine is 
H 
overheating. Stop the vehicle as 
soon as safely possible, switch off 
C 
the engine immediately and let the 
engine cool. Refer to Engine 
coolant in the Maintenance and 
care chapter. 
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is 
running or hot. 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the 
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication 
will not be accurate. 
Tachometer (if equipped) 
Indicates the engine speed in 
revolutions per minute. 
Driving with your tachometer 
pointer continuously at the top of 
the scale may damage the engine. 
2 
1 
0 
3 
4 5 6 
RPMx1000 
15
Speedometer 
Indicates the current vehicle speed. 
Odometer 
Registers the total kilometers 
(miles) of the vehicle. 
Trip odometer 
Registers the kilometers (miles) of 
individual journeys. To reset, 
depress the control. 
20 
50 
40 
60 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
100 
120 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
80 100 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
20 
50 
40 
60 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
100 
120 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
80 100 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
20 
50 
40 
60 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
100 
120 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
80 100 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
Instrumentation 
16
Engine oil pressure gauge 
This shows the engine oil pressure 
in the system. Sufficient pressure 
exists as long as the needle remains 
in the normal range (the area 
between the “L” and “H”). 
H 
If the gauge indicates low pressure, 
stop the vehicle as soon as safely 
possible and switch off the engine 
L 
immediately. Check the oil level. 
Add oil if needed (refer to Engine 
oil in the Maintenance and care 
chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your 
dealership or by a qualified technician. 
Battery voltage gauge 
This shows the battery voltage when 
the ignition is in the ON position. If 
the pointer moves and stays outside 
the normal operating range (as 
indicated), have the vehicle’s 
electrical system checked as soon as 
possible. 
L 
H 
Instrumentation 
17
HEADLAMP CONTROL 
Rotate the headlamp control to the 
first position to turn on the parking 
lamps. Rotate to the second position 
to also turn on the headlamps. 
Foglamp control (if equipped) 
Turn on the low-beam headlamps 
and press the foglamp control to 
activate the foglamps. The foglamp 
control will illuminate when the 
foglamps are on. 
Press the foglamp control a second time to deactivate the foglamps. 
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) 
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: 
² the ignition must be in the ON position and 
² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. 
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during 
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System 
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide 
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your 
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. 
High beams 
Push forward to activate. 
Pull toward you to deactivate. 
OFF 
Controls and features 
18
Flash to pass 
Pull toward you to activate and 
release to deactivate. 
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL 
Use to adjust the brightness of the 
instrument panel during headlamp 
and parklamp operation. 
² Rotate up to brighten. 
² Rotate down to dim. 
² Rotate to full up position (past 
detent) to turn on interior lamps. 
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM 
Heater only system (if equipped) 
Fan speed control 
Controls the volume of air circulated 
in the vehicle. 
Controls and features 
DIM 
OFF 
19
Temperature control knob 
Controls the temperature of the 
airflow inside the vehicle. On 
heater-only systems, the air cannot 
be cooled below the outside 
temperature. 
Mode selector control 
Controls the direction of the airflow 
to the inside of the vehicle. 
² (Panel)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel 
registers. 
² (Panel and floor)-Distributes outside air through the instrument 
panel registers and the floor ducts. 
² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. 
² (Floor)-Allows for maximum heating. Distributes outside air 
through the floor ducts. 
² (Floor and defrost)-Distributes outside air through the floor 
ducts and the windshield defroster ducts. 
² (Defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield 
defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. 
Operating tips 
² In humid weather, select before driving. This will reduce fogging 
on your windshield. After a few minutes, select any desired position. 
² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle, don’t drive with the 
climate control system in the OFF position. 
² Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the 
airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). 
OFF 
Controls and features 
20
² Remove any snow, ice or leaves 
from the air intake area (at the 
bottom of the windshield under 
the hood). 
Controls and features 
² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can 
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. 
Also, avoid placing small objects on top of your instrument panel. 
These objects can fall down into the defroster outlets and block 
airflow and possibly damage your climate control system. 
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these 
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
Manual heating and air conditioning system (if equipped) 
Fan speed control 
Controls the volume of air circulated 
in the vehicle. 
Temperature control knob 
Controls the temperature of the 
airflow inside the vehicle. 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
21
Controls and features 
Mode selector control 
Controls the direction of the airflow 
to the inside of the vehicle. 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
The air conditioning compressor will operate in all modes except 
and . However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside 
temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher. 
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air 
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under 
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you 
have stopped the vehicle. 
Under normal conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be 
left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is 
parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet 
duct. In snowy or dirty conditions, leave the mode selector in the OFF 
position. 
² MAX A/C-Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is noisier 
than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle 
faster. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. This mode 
can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the 
vehicle. 
² A/C-Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter than MAX A/C 
but not as economical. Airflow will be from the instrument panel 
registers. 
² (Panel)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel 
registers. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside 
temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this 
mode. 
² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short 
periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from 
entering the vehicle. 
² (Panel and floor)-Distributes outside air through the instrument 
panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning 
capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, 
when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full hot 
and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be 
slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. 
22
Controls and features 
² (Floor)-Allows for maximum heating by distributing outside air 
through the floor ducts. However, the air will not be cooled below the 
outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in 
this mode. 
² (Floor and defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield 
defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning 
capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, 
when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full hot 
and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be 
slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defrost ducts. If the 
temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher, the air conditioner will 
automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. 
² (Defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield 
defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. 
If the temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher, the air conditioner 
will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. 
Operating tips 
² In humid weather, select before driving. This will reduce fogging 
on your windshield. After a few minutes, select any desired position. 
² To prevent humidity buildup inside the vehicle, do not drive with the 
climate control system in the OFF or MAX A/C position. 
² Do not put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the 
airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). 
² Remove any snow, ice or leaves 
from the air intake area (at the 
bottom of the windshield under 
the hood). 
² If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during hot 
weather, the air conditioner will do a much faster job of cooling if you 
drive for two or three minutes with the windows open. This will force 
most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle. Then operate your air 
conditioner as you would normally. 
23
² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can 
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. 
Also, avoid placing small objects on top of your instrument panel. 
These objects can fall down into the defroster outlets and block 
airflow and possibly damage your climate control system. 
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these 
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
4WD CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 
This control operates the 4WD. 
Refer to the Driving chapter for 
more information. 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
Controls and features 
24
AUXILIARY POWER POINT 
Controls and features 
SEEK 12V 
TUNE 
1 2 3 4 AM-FM 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel. This outlet 
should be used in place of the cigarette lighter for optional electrical 
accessories. 
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFF SWITCH 
This switch must be used to 
deactivate the passenger air bag 
ON 
whenever a child seat is used in the 
OFF 
right front or center front passenger 
seat position. Refer to Passenger 
OFF 
air bag ON/OFF switch in the 
Seating and safety restraints 
chapter. 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
25
USING YOUR AUDIO SYSTEM 
AM/FM Stereo 
TONE ST DX 
SEEK 
FM 
CLK TUNE 
1 2 3 4 AM/FM 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
Turn the control to raise or lower 
volume. 
TONE VOL 
12 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
Controls and features 
26
Controls and features 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio mode. 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the 
control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
AM/FM 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SEEK 
TUNE 
27
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with four station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to four preset AM stations and eight 
FM stations (four in FM1 and four in FM2). 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more 
information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, 
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 
1 2 3 4 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Press the TONE control once, then 
use the volume knob to adjust the 
desired level. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
Press the TONE control twice, then 
use the volume knob to adjust the 
desired level. 
TONE 
CLK 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
TONE 
CLK 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
Controls and features 
28
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Press the TONE control three times, 
then use the volume knob to adjust 
the desired level. 
Speaker fade adjust (if equipped) 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Press the TONE control four times, 
then use the volume knob to adjust 
the desired level. 
Setting the clock 
Press CLK to toggle between 
listening frequencies and clock 
mode. 
To set the hour, press and hold the 
CLK control until CLOCK SET 
appears in the display and press the 
SEEK control: 
² to decrease hours and 
² to increase hours. 
Controls and features 
TONE 
CLK 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
TONE 
CLK 
VOL 
PUSH 
ON 
TONE 
CLK 
SEEK SEEK 
TUNE TUNE 
29
Controls and features 
To set the minute, press and hold 
the CLK control until CLOCK SET 
appears in the display and press the 
TUNE control: 
TONE 
CLK 
² to decrease minutes and 
SEEK 
SEEK 
² to increase minutes. 
The CLK control will allow you to 
TUNE 
TUNE 
switch between media display mode 
(radio station, stereo information, 
etc.) and clock display mode (time). 
When in clock mode, the media 
information will display for ten 
seconds, when the radio is turned 
on, and then revert to clock 
information. Anytime that the media is changed, (new radio station, 
etc.), the media information will again display for ten seconds before 
reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will 
always be displayed. 
AM/FM stereo cassette 
FM1 ST 
BASS TREB BAL FADE 
SCAN 
SIDE 
EJ 
TAPE 
AMS 
1 - 2 
REW FF 
VOL - PUSH ON 
SEEK 
TUNE 
AM 
FM 
CLK 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
30
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
Turn the control to raise or lower 
volume. 
Controls and features 
VOL - PUSH ON 
VOL - PUSH ON 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio and tape modes. 
AM 
FM 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
AM control to select from AM selections, and press the FM control to 
select from FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in tape mode 
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. 
31
Controls and features 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the 
control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
SEEK 
TUNE 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio 
mode. 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SCAN 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations 
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan 
mode. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve 
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
32
Controls and features 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM or the FM select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more 
information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, 
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
BASS 
TREB 
33
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Tape select 
² To enter tape mode while in radio 
mode, press the TAPE AMS 
control. 
BAL 
FADE 
CLK 
TAPE 
AMS 
Automatic Music Search 
The Automatic Music Search feature 
allows you to quickly locate the 
beginning of the tape selection 
CLK 
being played or to skip to the next 
selection. 
TAPE 
To activate the feature, momentarily 
AMS 
depress the TAPE AMS button. 
Then, press either REW (for the 
beginning of the current selection) or FF (to advance to the next 
Controls and features 
34
Controls and features 
selection). The tape deck stops and returns to play mode when the AMS 
circuit senses a blank section on the tape. 
In order to ensure proper operation of the AMS feature, the tape MUST 
have a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in tape 
mode. 
To rewind in tape mode, press the 
REW control. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in 
tape mode. 
² In the tape mode, tape direction 
will automatically reverse when 
the end of the tape is reached. 
Tape direction select 
Press SIDE and 1–2 at the same 
time to play the alternate side of a 
tape. 
Eject function 
Press the control to stop and eject a 
tape. 
SIDE 
REW FF 
1 - 2 
SIDE 
REW FF 
1 - 2 
SIDE 
REW FF 
1 - 2 
EJ 
DolbyT noise reduction 
Dolbyt noise reduction operates 
only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise 
reduction reduces the amount of 
4 
hiss and static during tape playback. 
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) Dolbyt noise 
reduction. 
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt 
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol 
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 
35
Controls and features 
Setting the clock 
Press CLK to toggle between 
listening frequencies and clock 
mode while in radio mode. 
To set the hour, press and hold the 
CLK control and press the SEEK 
control: 
² to decrease hours and 
² to increase hours. 
To set the minute, press and hold 
the CLK control and press the 
TUNE control: 
² to decrease minutes and 
² to increase minutes. 
CLK 
TAPE 
AMS 
SEEK SEEK 
TUNE TUNE 
CLK 
TAPE 
AMS 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SEEK 
TUNE 
The CLK control will allow you to switch between media display mode 
(radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time). 
36
Controls and features 
When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds, 
when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. 
Anytime that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media 
information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the 
clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. 
AM/FM Stereo / Single CD Radio 
BASS 
CD 
FM1 ST 
TREB BAL FADE 
TUNE 
CD CD SHUFFLE 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
SCN 
CLK 
AM 
FM 
VOL - PUSH ON 
SEEK EJ 
COMP 
DISC 
DISCS 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
VOL - PUSH ON 
37
Turn the control to raise or lower 
volume. 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio and CD modes. 
AM 
FM 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in CD mode 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio and CD changer mode (if equipped). 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the 
control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
VOL - PUSH ON 
CD 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
Controls and features 
38
Controls and features 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Tune adjust for CD changer (if equipped) 
² Press to select the previous 
SEEK 
disc in the CD changer. (Play will 
begin on the first track of the 
disc unless the CD changer is in 
TUNE 
DISCS 
shuffle mode. Refer to Shuffle 
feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing 
through the disc. 
² Press to select the next disc in the CD changer. Hold the control 
to fast-forward through the remaining discs. 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio or CD mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
Seek function for CD mode 
² Press to seek to the previous 
track of the current disc. If a 
selection has been playing for 
three seconds or more and you 
press , the CD changer will 
replay that selection from the beginning. 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After 
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc 
will automatically replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio or 
CD mode. 
SCN 
39
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations 
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan 
mode. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first 
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the 
control again. 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
BASS 
TREB 
BAL 
Controls and features 
40
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
CD select 
² To begin CD play (if CD[s] are 
loaded), press the CD control. 
The first track of the disc will 
begin playing. After that, CD play 
will begin where it stopped last. 
Controls and features 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in CD mode. 
To rewind in CD mode, press the 
CD control (preset 1). 
Press the control again to deactivate 
rewind mode. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in CD mode. 
To fast forward in CD changer 
mode, press the CD control (preset 
2). 
Press the control again to deactivate 
fast forward mode. 
Eject function 
Press the control to stop and eject a 
CD. 
FADE 
AM 
FM 
CD 
CD 
1 
CD 
2 
EJ 
41
Compression feature 
Compression adjust brings soft and 
loud CD passages together for a 
more consistent listening level. 
Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. 
Shuffle feature (if equipped with CD changer) 
The shuffle feature operates in CD 
changer mode only and plays all 
tracks on the current disc in random 
order. The shuffle feature continues 
to the next disc after all tracks are played. 
Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will 
continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. 
Setting the clock 
Press CLK to toggle between 
listening frequencies and clock 
mode while in radio mode. 
To set the hour, press and hold the 
CLK control and press the SEEK 
control: 
² to decrease hours and 
² to increase hours. 
To set the minute, press and hold 
the CLK control and press the 
TUNE control: 
COMP 
SHUFFLE 
6 
SCN 
CLK 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
Controls and features 
42
² to decrease minutes and 
² to increase minutes. 
Controls and features 
Premium AM/FM Stereo/Cassette/Single CD 
DOLBY B NR 
ST 
SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL 
AM FM 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
Audio power can also be turned on 
by pressing the AM/FM select 
control or the tape/CD select 
control. Audio power is turned off 
by using the volume/power control. 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SEEK 
TUNE 
FM 1 
AMC 
BL RF 
REW FF 
TAPE 
DISC 
EJ CD 
FADE 
AUTO 
CLK 
SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
EJ 
MUTE 
VOL PUSH ON 
SEEK 
TUNE 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
VOL - PUSH ON 
43
Turn control to raise or lower 
volume. 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio, tape and CD modes. 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in tape mode 
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the 
control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
² Press to move to the next 
frequency up the band (whether 
or not a listenable station is 
located there). Hold for quick 
movement. 
VOL - PUSH ON 
AM FM 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SEEK 
TUNE 
Controls and features 
44
Controls and features 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the next 
listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
SEEK SEEK 
TUNE TUNE 
Seek function in tape mode 
² Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape. 
² Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. 
Seek function in CD mode 
² Press to seek to the previous 
track of the current disc. 
² Press to seek forward to the 
next track of the current disc. 
After the last track has been 
completed, the first track of the 
current disc will automatically 
replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio, 
tape or CD mode. 
SEEK SEEK 
TUNE TUNE 
SCAN 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations 
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode. 
45
Controls and features 
Scan function in tape mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s 
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the 
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first 
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the 
control again. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve 
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
Setting memory preset stations 
AM FM 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more 
information on selecting a station. 
REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, 
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 
Autoset memory preset 
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your 
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips 
when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 
46
Controls and features 
Starting autoset memory preset 
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 
2. Press the AUTO control. 
3. When the first six strong stations 
are filled, the station stored in 
memory preset control 1 will start 
playing. 
If there are less than six strong 
stations available on the frequency 
band, the remaining memory preset 
controls will all store the last strong station available. 
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls 
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner of your original 
presets. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set 
memory stations, press the AUTO control again. 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Press the BASS control then press: 
² to decrease the bass output 
and 
² to increase the bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
AUTO 
CLK 
BASS TREB 
SEL 
BASS TREB 
47
Press the TREB control then press: 
² to decrease the treble output 
and 
² to increase the treble output. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Press the BAL control then press: 
² to shift sound to the left and 
² to shift sound to the right. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Press the FADE control then press: 
² to shift the sound to the 
front and 
² to shift the sound to the rear. 
SEL 
BAL FADE 
SEL 
BAL FADE 
SEL 
Controls and features 
48
Tape select 
² To begin tape play (with a tape 
Controls and features 
loaded into the audio system) 
while in the radio or CD mode, 
press the TAPE control. Press the 
button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast 
forward function. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in tape 
and CD modes. 
² In tape mode, radio play will 
continue until rewind is stopped 
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the 
current track. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in 
tape and CD modes. 
² In the tape mode, tape direction 
will automatically reverse when 
the end of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the control fast forwards the CD within the 
current track. 
Tape direction select 
Press SIDE 1–2 to play the alternate 
side of a tape. 
Eject function 
Press the EJ control to stop and 
eject a tape. 
TAPE CD 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1-2 
3 
EJ 
49
Press the EJ control to stop and 
eject a CD. 
EJ 
DolbyT noise reduction 
Dolbyt noise reduction operates in 
tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction 
reduces the amount of hiss and 
4 
static during tape playback. 
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolbyt noise 
reduction. 
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt 
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D 
symbol are trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation. 
Compression adjust 
Compression adjust brings soft and 
loud CD passages together for a 
COMP 
more consistent listening level. 
5 
Press the COMP control to activate 
and deactivate compression adjust. 
Shuffle feature 
The shuffle feature operates in CD 
mode (if equipped) and plays all 
SHUFFLE 
tracks on the current disc in random 
6 
order. If equipped with the CD 
changer, the shuffle feature 
continues to the next disc after all tracks on the current disc are played. 
Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will 
continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. 
Controls and features 
50
Setting the clock 
To set the hour, press and hold the 
CLK control and press SEEK: 
² to decrease hours and 
² to increase hours. 
To set the minute, press and hold 
the CLK control and press TUNE: 
² to decrease minutes and 
² to increase minutes. 
If your vehicle has a separate clock 
module, (other than the digital radio 
display), the CLK button will not 
function in the above manner. 
Controls and features 
AUTO 
CLK 
SEEK SEEK 
TUNE TUNE 
AUTO 
CLK 
SEEK 
TUNE 
SEEK 
TUNE 
51
The CLK button will allow you to 
switch between media display mode 
(radio station, stereo information, 
etc.) and clock display mode (time). 
When in clock mode, the media 
information will display for 10 
seconds, when the radio is turned 
on, and then revert to clock 
information. Anytime that the media 
is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again 
display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, 
the media information will always be displayed. 
Mute mode 
Press the control to mute the 
playing media. Press the control 
again to return to the playing media. 
Cleaning compact discs 
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean 
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe the center out to the 
edge. Do not use circular motion. 
Cleaning cassette player (if equipped) 
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 
12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. 
Cassette and cassette player care 
² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. 
² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or 
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme 
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. 
² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole 
and turning the hub. 
² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. 
AUTO 
CLK 
EJ 
MUTE 
Controls and features 
52
Controls and features 
² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not 
being played. 
Radio frequency information 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio 
and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies 
AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies 
are: 
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz 
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz 
Not all frequencies are used in a given area. 
Radio reception factors 
Three factors can affect radio reception: 
² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. 
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km 
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal 
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their 
strength/volume relative to other stations. 
² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s 
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. 
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, 
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering 
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. 
² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger 
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may 
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station 
frequency is displayed. 
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it 
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. 
Audio system warranties and service 
Refer to the “Warranty Guide” for audio system warranty information. 
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 
53
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 
² Push down to activate the left 
turn signal. 
² Push up to activate the right turn 
signal. 
POSITIONS OF THE IGNITION 
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical 
accessories such as the radio to 
operate while the engine is not 
4 
3 
running. 
5 
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 
automatic transmission gearshift 
2 
lever and allows key removal. 
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 
accessories without locking the 
1 
steering wheel. 
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key 
position when driving. 
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine 
starts. 
Controls and features 
54
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 
To turn speed control on 
² Press ON. 
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled 
until the vehicle is traveling at or 
above 48 km/h (30 mph). 
Controls and features 
ON 
OFF 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that 
are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 
Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed 
control on. 
To turn speed control off 
² Press OFF or 
² Turn off the vehicle ignition. 
ON 
OFF 
Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed 
will be erased. 
55
Controls and features 
To set a speed 
² Press SET/SET ACC/SET ACCEL. 
For speed control to operate, the 
speed control must be ON and 
the vehicle speed must be greater 
than 48 km/h (30 mph). 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
COAST 
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary 
momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. 
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the 
set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set 
speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next 
lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. 
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set 
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. 
Pressing RES/RSM/RESUME will re-engage it. 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that 
are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 
To set a higher set speed 
² Press and hold SET/SET ACC/ 
SET ACCEL. Release the control 
when the desired vehicle speed is 
reached or 
² Press and release SET/SET ACC/ 
SET ACCEL. Each press will 
increase the set speed by 1.6 
km/h (1 mph) or 
² Accelerate with your accelerator 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
COAST 
pedal. When the desired vehicle 
speed is reached, press and release SET/SET ACC/SET ACCEL. 
56
Controls and features 
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed 
control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to 
the previously programmed set speed. 
To set a lower set speed 
² Press and hold CST/COAST. 
Release the control when the 
desired speed is reached or 
² Press and release CST/COAST. 
Each press will decrease the set 
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
² Depress the brake pedal. When 
the desired vehicle speed is 
reached, press SET/SET ACC/ 
SET ACCEL. 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
COAST 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
COAST 
57
To disengage speed control 
² Depress the brake pedal or 
² Depress the clutch pedal (if 
equipped). 
Disengaging the speed control will 
not erase the previously 
programmed set speed. 
Pressing OFF will erase the 
previously programmed set speed. 
ON 
OFF 
Controls and features 
58
To return to a previously set speed 
² Press RES/RSM/RESUME. For 
RES/RSM/RESUME to operate, 
the vehicle speed must be faster 
than 48 km/h (30 mph). 
Controls and features 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
COAST 
Indicator light (if equipped) 
This light comes on when either the 
SET ACC/SET ACCEL or RES/RSM/ 
SPEED 
RESUME controls are pressed. It 
CONT 
turns off when the speed control 
OFF control is pressed, the brake is applied or the ignition is turned to 
the OFF position. 
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 
Activating overdrive 
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. 
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through 
all available gears. 
Deactivating overdrive 
Press the Transmission Control 
Switch (TCS) located on the end of 
O/D 
the gearshift lever. The 
ON/OFF 
Transmission Control Indicator Light 
(TCIL) will illuminate on the 
instrument cluster. 
The transmission will operate in all 
gears except overdrive. To return to 
O/D 
normal overdrive mode, press the 
ON/OFF 
Transmission Control Switch again. 
The TCIL will no longer be 
illuminated. 
59
Controls and features 
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will 
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. 
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission 
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission 
Operation section of the Driving chapter. 
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) 
Pull the tilt steering control toward 
you to move the steering wheel up 
or down. Hold the control while 
adjusting the wheel to the desired 
position, then release the control to 
lock the steering wheel in position. 
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 
HAZARD FLASHER 
For information on the hazard flasher control, refer to Hazard flasher in 
the Roadside emergencies chapter. 
60
Controls and features 
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS 
Rotate the windshield wiper control 
to the desired interval, low or high 
speed position. 
The bars of varying length are for 
intermittent wipers. When in this 
position rotate the control upward 
for fast intervals and downward for 
slow intervals. 
Push (tap) the end of the stalk 
briefly for a single swipe (no wash). 
Push and hold for three swipes with 
wash. Push and hold for a longer 
wash (up to ten seconds). 
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. 
² Press the top portion of the 
rocker switch to close. 
² Press the bottom portion of the 
rocker switch to open. 
AUTO 
AUTO 
61
Controls and features 
One touch down 
² Press AUTO completely down and 
release quickly. The driver’s 
window will open fully. Depress 
again to stop window operation. 
One touch down can be deactivated 
during operation by pushing up on 
the power window control. 
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Press the top of the control to 
unlock all doors and the bottom to 
lock all doors. 
AUTO 
UNLOCK 
LOCK 
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED) 
To adjust your mirrors: 
1. Select to adjust the left mirror or to adjust the right mirror. 
2. Move the control in the direction 
you wish to tilt the mirror. 
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 
62
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 
variety of console features. These 
include: 
² Utility compartment with 
cassette/compact disc storage 
² Cupholders 
² Coin holder slots 
² Flip up armrest 
² Removable utility bag (if 
equipped) 
Controls and features 
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you 
in a collision. 
CARGO AREA FEATURES 
Cargo area shade (if equipped) 
Your vehicle may be equipped with notches in the side trim panels that 
are used for a cargo area shade. See your dealer for more information. 
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors 
without a key. 
The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the OFF 
position. 
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, 
ensure ALL key fobs (remote entry transmitters) are brought to the 
dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. 
63
Controls and features 
Unlocking the doors 
Press this control to unlock the 
driver’s door. The interior lamps will 
illuminate. 
Press the control a second time 
within five seconds to unlock all 
doors. 
Locking the doors 
Press this control to lock all doors. 
To confirm all doors are closed and 
locked, press the control a second 
time within five seconds. The doors 
will lock again, the horn will chirp 
and the lamps will flash. 
If any of the doors are ajar, the horn 
will make two quick chirps, 
reminding you to properly close all 
doors. 
Sounding a panic alarm 
Press this control to activate the 
alarm. 
To deactivate the alarm, press the 
control again or turn the ignition to 
ACC or ON. 
This device complies with part 15 of 
the FCC rules and with RS-210 of 
Industry Canada. Operation is 
subject to the following two 
conditions: (1) This device may not 
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any 
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired 
operation. 
64
Controls and features 
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party 
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to 
operate the equipment. 
Replacing the battery 
The transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium battery 
CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 
10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in operating 
range can be caused by: 
² weather conditions 
² nearby radio towers 
² structures around the vehicle 
² other vehicles parked next to the vehicle 
To replace the battery: 
1. Twist a thin coin between the two 
halves of the transmitter near the 
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE 
FRONT PART OF THE 
TRANSMITTER APART. 
2. Place the positive (+) side of new 
battery in the same orientation. 
Refer to the diagram inside the 
transmitter unit. 
3. Snap the two halves back 
together. 
65
Controls and features 
Replacing lost transmitters 
If a remote transmitter has been lost 
and you would like to remove it 
from the vehicle’s memory, or you 
would like to purchase additional 
remote transmitters and have them 
programmed to your vehicle: 
² Take all your vehicle’s 
transmitters to your dealer for 
programming, or 
² Perform the programming 
procedure yourself 
Programming remote transmitters 
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of 
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. 
To program the transmitters yourself: 
² Insert a key in the ignition and 
turn from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) 
eight times in rapid succession 
(within 10 seconds) with the 
eighth turn ending in the 4 (ON) 
position. The doors will lock/ 
unlock to confirm that 
programming mode has been 
entered. 
² Within 20 seconds, program a 
3 
2 
1 
5 
4 
remote transmitter by pressing 
any button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that 
the remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 
seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the 
programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be 
repeated.) 
² Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. 
The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has 
been programmed. 
² When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn 
the ignition to 3 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will 
lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed. 
66
Controls and features 
Illuminated entry 
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to 
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm. 
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition 
is turned to the RUN or ACC position. The dome lamp control (if 
equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry 
system to operate. 
The inside lights will not turn off if: 
² they have been turned on with the dimmer control or 
² any door is open. 
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 40 minutes after the 
ignition has been turned to the OFF position. 
SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system provides an advanced level of 
vehicle theft protection. Your vehicle’s engine can only be started with 
the two special SecuriLocky electronically coded keys provided with 
your vehicle. Each time you start your vehicle, the SecuriLocky key is 
read by the SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system. If the SecuriLocky 
key identification code matches the code stored in the SecuriLocky 
passive anti-theft system, the vehicle’s engine is allowed to start. If the 
SecuriLocky key identification code does not match the code stored in 
the system or if a SecuriLocky key is not detected (vehicle theft 
situation), the vehicle’s engine will not operate. 
If there is any potential SecuriLocky anti-theft problem with your 
vehicle, ensure ALL SecuriLocky keys for that vehicle are brought to 
the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. 
The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with 
aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in 
vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Large metallic 
objects, electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase 
gasoline or similar items, or a second key on the same key ring as the 
PATS ignition key may cause vehicle starting concern and record DTC’s 
under certain conditions. If present, you need to keep these objects from 
touching the PATS ignition key while starting the engine. These objects 
and devices cannot damage the PATS ignition key, but can cause a 
momentary concern if they are too close to the key during engine start. 
If a problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all 
67
Controls and features 
other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to 
make sure the encoded ignition key is an approved Ford encoded 
ignition key. 
Spare SecuriLocky keys can be purchased from your dealership and 
programmed to your SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system. Refer to 
Programming spare SecuriLocky keys for more information. 
If one or both of your SecuriLocky keys are lost or stolen and you want 
to ensure the lost or stolen key will not operate your vehicle, bring your 
vehicle and all available SecuriLocky keys to your dealership for 
reinitialization. 
Theft indicator 
The theft indicator on the instrument cluster will operate as follows: 
² When the ignition is OFF, the theft indicator will flash briefly every 
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLocky system is protecting your 
vehicle. 
² When the ignition is turned to RUN or START, the theft indicator will 
light for three seconds and then go out. If the theft indicator stays on 
for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system 
serviced by your dealership or a qualified technician. 
The Theft indicator is controlled by the SecuriLocky system. During 
the 30 second prearm state, it is normal to see the theft indicator pulse 
brighter behind the constant glow. 
Programming spare SecuriLockY keys 
Spare SecuriLocky keys can be purchased from your dealership and 
programmed to your SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system (up to a 
total of eight keys). Your dealership can program your new SecuriLocky 
key(s) to your vehicle or you can do it yourself using the following 
simple procedure. To program a new SecuriLocky key yourself, you will 
need two previously programmed SecuriLocky keys (keys that already 
operate your vehicle’s engine). If two previously programmed 
SecuriLocky keys are not available (one or both of your original keys 
were lost or stolen), you must bring your vehicle to your dealership to 
have the spare SecuriLocky key(s) programmed. 
68
Controls and features 
Procedure to program spare SecuriLockY keys to your vehicle 
New SecuriLocky keys must have the correct mechanical key cut for 
your vehicle. 
Conventional (non-SecuriLocky) keys cannot be programmed to your 
vehicle. 
You will need to have two previously programmed SecuriLocky keys and 
the new unprogrammed SecuriLocky key readily accessible for the 
procedure. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you 
begin. 
1. Insert the first previously programmed SecuriLocky key into the 
ignition and turn the ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON 
for at least one second). 
2. Turn ignition to OFF and remove the first SecuriLocky key from the 
ignition. 
3. Within five seconds of turning the ignition to OFF, insert the second 
previously programmed SecuriLocky key into the ignition and turn the 
ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON for at least one second 
but no more than five seconds). 
4. Turn the ignition to OFF and remove the second SecuriLocky key 
from the ignition. 
5. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to OFF, insert the 
unprogrammed SecuriLocky key (new key/valet key) into the ignition 
and turn the ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON for at 
least one second). This step will program your new SecuriLocky key. 
6. To program additional SecuriLocky key(s), repeat this procedure from 
step 1. 
If the programming procedure was successful, the new SecuriLocky 
key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine. The theft indicator (located on the 
instrument cluster) will light for three seconds and then go out. 
If the programming procedure was not successful, the new SecuriLocky 
key(s) will not operate the vehicle’s engine. The theft indicator will flash 
on and off. Wait at least one minute and then repeat the procedure from 
step 1. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to have 
the spare SecuriLocky key(s) programmed. 
69
Seating and safety restraints 
SEATING 
Adjusting the front manual seat 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is 
moving. 
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of 
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
Reclining the seatback can reduce the effectiveness of the seat’s 
safety belt in the event of a collision. 
Lift handle to move seat forward or 
backward. 
70
Seating and safety restraints 
Pull lever up to adjust seatback. 
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped) 
Turn the lumbar support control 
clockwise to increase firmness. 
Turn the lumbar support control 
counterclockwise to increase 
softness. 
REAR SEATS 
Center facing jump seat (2 door SuperCab) (if equipped) 
To open, pull inboard and down on the seat handle. 
To stow the seat, pull seat bottom back to the fully upright position. 
Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. 
71
Seating and safety restraints 
Center facing jump seat (4 door SuperCab) (if equipped) 
To open, pull seat assembly down, 
then raise seatback. 
To stow the seat, fold seat back 
down and raise seat assembly to the 
fully upright position. 
Do not install a child seat in 
a center facing jump seat. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS 
Safety restraints precautions 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they 
can be properly restrained. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag SRS is 
provided. 
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or 
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas 
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to 
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and 
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a 
safety belt properly. 
72
Seating and safety restraints 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. 
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt 
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that 
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the 
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside 
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 
On four-door SuperCab vehicles, do not open the rear door when 
the rear seat belt is still buckled. 
Combination lap and shoulder belts 
1. Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming 
from) until you hear a snap and feel 
it latch. Make sure the tongue is 
securely fastened in the buckle. 
2. To unfasten, push the release 
button and remove the tongue from 
the buckle. 
73
Seating and safety restraints 
The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap 
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two 
types of locking modes described below: 
Energy Management Feature 
² This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management 
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce 
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. 
² This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay 
out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help 
reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. 
After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard 
seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking 
retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify 
that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still 
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for 
proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if 
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or 
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked 
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could 
increase the risk of injury in collisions. 
Vehicle sensitive mode 
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free 
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in 
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes 
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of 
approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will 
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. 
Automatic locking mode 
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will 
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. 
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 
74
Seating and safety restraints 
When to use the automatic locking mode 
² Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or 
outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and 
under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever 
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for 
Children later in this chapter. 
How to use the automatic locking mode 
² Buckle the combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
² Grasp the shoulder portion and 
pull downward until the entire 
belt is extracted. 
² Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking 
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking 
mode. 
75
Seating and safety restraints 
How to disengage the automatic locking mode 
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract 
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the 
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 
After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard 
seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking 
retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify 
that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still 
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for 
proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if 
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or 
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked 
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could 
increase the risk of injury in collisions. 
Front safety belt height adjustment 
Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front 
passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across 
the middle of your shoulder. 
76
Seating and safety restraints 
² Regular Cab and 4–door Super 
Cab 
² 2–door SuperCab 
To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height 
adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height 
adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in 
place. 
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests 
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety 
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and 
increase the risk of injury in a collision. 
77
Seating and safety restraints 
Lap belts 
Adjusting the front center seat lap belt (if equipped) 
The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the 
hips, not around the waist. 
Insert the tongue into the correct 
buckle (the buckle closest to the 
direction the tongue is coming 
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the 
tongue at a right angle to the belt 
and pull across your lap until it 
reaches the buckle. To tighten the 
belt, pull the loose end of the belt 
through the tongue until it fits 
snugly across the hips. 
Shorten and fasten the belt when 
not in use. 
Adjusting the rear center facing jump seat lap belt (if equipped) 
The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and 
with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue 
into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach 
the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out 
again. 
78
Seating and safety restraints 
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the 
hips, not around the waist. 
If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and repeat the procedure 
above. 
To unfasten the belt, push in the release button prior to opening the rear 
door. 
Safety belt extension assembly 
If the safety belt assembly is too short, even when fully extended, 20 cm 
(8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by adding a safety 
belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extension 
assemblies can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. 
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety 
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on 
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too 
short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the 
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. 
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a 
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 
Conditions of operation 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
buckled before the ignition switch 
is turned to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light 
illuminates1-2 minutes and the 
warning chime sounds 4-8 
seconds. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
while the indicator light is 
illuminated and the warning chime 
is sounding... 
The safety belt warning light and 
warning chime turn off. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
before the ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light and 
indicator chime remain off. 
79
Seating and safety restraints 
Belt minder (if equipped) 
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt 
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the 
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently 
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster. 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
buckled before the vehicle has 
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) 
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed 
since the ignition switch has been 
turned to ON... 
The Belt Minder feature is 
activated - the safety belt warning 
light illuminates and the warning 
chime sounds for 6 seconds every 
30 seconds, repeating for 
approximately 5 minutes or until 
safety belt is buckled. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
while the safety belt indicator light 
is illuminated and the safety belt 
warning chime is sounding... 
The Belt Minder feature will not 
activate. 
The driver’s safety belt is buckled 
before the ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The Belt Minder feature will not 
activate. 
The purpose of the Belt Minder is to remind occasional wearers to wear 
safety belts all of the time. 
80
Seating and safety restraints 
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: 
(All statistics based on U.S. data) 
Reasons given... Consider... 
9Crashes are rare 
events9 
36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we 
drive, the more we are exposed to 9rare9 events, 
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously 
injured in a crash during our lifetime. 
9I’m not going far9 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. 
9Belts are 
uncomfortable9 
Ford designs its safety belts to enhance comfort. If 
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for 
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback 
which should be as upright as possible; this can 
improve comfort. 
9I was in a hurry9 Prime time for an accident. Belt Minder reminds 
us to take a few seconds to buckle up. 
9Seat belts don’t 
work9 
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of 
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, 
and by 60% in light trucks. 
9Traffic is light9 Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle 
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. 
9Belts wrinkle my 
clothes9 
Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more 
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are 
unbelted. 
9The people I’m 
with don’t wear 
belts9 
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more 
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. 
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate 
behavior they see. 
9I have an air bag9 Air bags offer greater protection when used with 
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to 
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. 
9I’d rather be 
thrown clear9 
Not a good idea, people who are ejected are 40 
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help 
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T 9PICK OUR CRASH9. 
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt 
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase risk of 
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt 
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. 
81
Seating and safety restraints 
One time disable 
Anytime the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition 
ON cycle, Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. 
Deactivating/activating the belt minder feature 
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the 
deactivation/activation programming procedure. 
The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the 
following procedure: 
Before following the procedure, make sure that: 
² the parking brake is set 
² the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral 
position (manual transmission). 
² the ignition switch is in the OFF position 
² all vehicle doors are closed 
² the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled 
² the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped 
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) 
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt 
Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT 
START THE ENGINE) 
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 
minutes) 
² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will 
have to be repeated. 
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during Belt Minder 
warning activation. 
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. 
² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three 
seconds. 
82
Seating and safety restraints 
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, 
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. 
² This will disable Belt Minder if it is currently enabled, or enable Belt 
Minder if it is currently disabled. 
7. Confirmation of disabling Belt Minder is provided by flashing the 
safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 
8. Confirmation of enabling Belt Minder is provided by flashing the safety 
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by 
three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by 
flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three 
seconds again. 
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is 
complete. 
Safety belt maintenance 
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work 
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure 
there are no nicks, wears or cuts, replacing if necessary. All safety belt 
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle 
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder 
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if 
equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and 
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford 
recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a 
collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified 
technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to 
operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies 
not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if 
either damage or improper operation is noted. 
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt 
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe 
personal injuries in the event of a collision. 
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the 
Maintenance and care section. 
83
Seating and safety restraints 
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 
OFF 
50 
40 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
F H H H 
E L 
BRAKE 
20 
100 
60 
80 100 
120 
SEEK 
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module 
which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the 
event of a collision this module may save information related to the 
collision including information about the air bag system and impact 
severity. This information will assist Ford in the servicing of your vehicle 
and may help Ford better understand real world collisions and further 
improve the safety of future vehicles. 
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions 
The supplemental restraint system 
is designed to work with the safety 
belt to help protect the driver and 
right front passenger from certain 
upper body injuries. 
Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or 
gently and the risk of injury from a 
deploying air bag is greatest close to 
the trim covering the air bag 
module. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag SRS is 
provided. 
RSM 
SET 
ACC 
OFF COAST 
ON 
SRS 
ABS 
! P 
SPEED 
CONT 
O/D 
OFF 
P R N D 2 1 
L L 
10 MPH 
60 70 
30 
80 
90 
km/h 
0 0 0 
110 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
140 
160 
20 180 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
TUNE 
1 2 3 4 AM-FM 
ON 
OFF 
OFF 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
84
Seating and safety restraints 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) 
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) 
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. 
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air 
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. 
Never place a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless the 
passenger air bag is turned off. 
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag: 
² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the 
pedals comfortably. 
² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright 
position. 
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing 
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those 
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing 
serious injury. 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag 
Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
Children and air bags 
For additional important safety information, read all information on 
safety restraints in this guide. 
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these 
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. 
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal 
injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant 
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger 
air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. 
85
Seating and safety restraints 
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? 
The air bag SRS is designed to 
activate when the vehicle sustains 
sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 
The fact that the air bags did not 
inflate in a collision does not mean 
that something is wrong with the 
system. Rather, it means the forces 
were not of the type sufficient to 
cause activation. Air bags are 
designed to inflate in frontal and 
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, 
side-impact, or rear-impacts. 
The air bags inflate and deflate 
rapidly upon activation. After air bag 
deployment, it is normal to notice a 
smoke-like, powdery residue or 
smell the burnt propellant. This may 
consist of cornstarch, talcum 
powder (to lubricate the bag) or 
sodium compounds (e.g., baking 
soda) that result from the 
combustion process that inflates the 
air bag. Small amounts of sodium 
hydroxide may be present which 
may irritate the skin and eyes, but 
none of the residue is toxic. 
While the system is designed to help 
reduce serious injuries, it may also 
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air 
bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of 
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or 
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly 
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag 
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly 
restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while 
maintaining vehicle control. 
86
Seating and safety restraints 
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not 
touch them after inflation. 
If the air bag is deployed, the air bag will not function again 
and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not 
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a 
collision. 
The SRS consists of: 
² driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and 
air bags), 
² one or more impact and safing sensors, passenger air bag deactivation 
switch and diagnostic monitor (RCM) 
² a readiness light and tone, 
² and the electrical wiring which connects the components. 
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits 
and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the 
passenger air bag deactivation switch, the impact sensors, the system 
wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and 
the air bag ignitors). 
Determining if the system is operational 
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster and the 
passenger air bag deactivate switch or a tone to indicate the condition of 
the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness section in the 
Instrumentation chapter or Passenger air bag deactivate switch 
section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not 
required. 
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 
² The readiness lights will either 
flash or stay lit. 
² The readiness lights will not 
illuminate immediately after 
ignition is turned on. 
² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat 
periodically until the problem and light are repaired. 
87
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced 
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless 
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a 
collision. 
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles 
(including pretensioners) 
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local 
dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by 
qualified personnel. 
Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch 
An air bag ON/OFF switch 
has been installed in this 
vehicle. Before driving, always 
look at the face of the switch to 
be sure the switch is in the proper 
position in accordance with these 
instructions and warnings. Failure 
to put the switch in a proper 
position can increase the risk of 
serious injury or death in a 
collision. 
Turning the passenger air bag off 
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the 
switch to OFF position and hold in 
OFF position while removing the 
key. 
2. When the ignition is turned to the 
ON position the OFF light 
illuminates briefly, momentarily 
shuts off and then turns back on. 
This indicates that the passenger air 
bag is deactivated. 
ON 
OFF 
OFF 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
ON 
OFF 
OFF 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
Seating and safety restraints 
88
Seating and safety restraints 
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch 
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the 
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury 
dealer immediately. 
In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always 
remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF 
switch. 
Turning the passenger air bag back on 
The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON. 
1. Insert the ignition key and turn 
the switch to ON. 
ON 
2. The OFF light will briefly 
illuminate when the ignition is 
turned to ON. This indicates that 
the passenger air bag is operational. 
OFF 
OFF 
PASSENGER AIRBAG 
If the light is illuminated when the passenger air bag ON/OFF 
switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, 
have the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. 
The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light 
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets 
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the 
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows. 
89
Seating and safety restraints 
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating 
positions have been specifically designed to function together 
with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your 
air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may 
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was 
designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets 
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation 
criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury 
or death in a collision. 
Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. If a child in 
a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the 
passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the 
infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal 
injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial. 
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air 
bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening 
injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a 
potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat 
occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce 
the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall 
safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly 
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the 
protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the 
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to 
deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing 
benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the 
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to 
work as a safety system with the air bags. 
Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other 
important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide. 
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada) 
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat 
because: 
² the vehicle has no rear seat; 
² the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing 
infant seat; or 
90
Seating and safety restraints 
² the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s 
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that 
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat 
because: 
² the vehicle has no rear seat; 
² although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever 
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front 
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or 
² the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s 
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so 
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, 
according to his or her physician: 
² causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger; 
and 
² makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash 
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and 
allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or 
windshield in a crash. 
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the 
driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are 
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of 
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to 
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce 
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of 
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if 
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might 
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a 
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the 
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for 
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation 
criteria. 
91
Seating and safety restraints 
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only) 
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat 
because: 
² my vehicle has no rear seat; 
² the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant 
seat; or 
² the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s 
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so 
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition. 
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the 
front seat because: 
² my vehicle has no rear seat; 
² although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever 
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes 
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or 
² the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s 
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so 
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition. 
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that, 
according to his or her physician: 
² poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and 
² makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment 
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and 
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag 
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the 
driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are 
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of 
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to 
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce 
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of 
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the 
air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might permit 
the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or 
fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the 
greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for any person who 
does not qualify under the Transport Canada deactivation criteria. 
92
Seating and safety restraints 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN 
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety 
restraints for children. Also see Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System 
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. 
Important child restraint precautions 
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. 
and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who 
are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you 
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your 
local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the 
safety of children in your vehicle. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or 
child restraint you might use. 
When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of 
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when 
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating 
positions. 
Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. 
Children and safety belts 
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. 
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your 
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. 
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that 
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. 
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can 
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or 
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child 
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt 
fit. 
93
Seating and safety restraints 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in 
your vehicle. 
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have 
outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning 
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all Federal motor vehicle 
safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and 
provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating 
posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. 
A belt-positioning booster should be used if the shoulder belt rests in 
front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on 
both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way 
back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the 
seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the special needs of your child 
with your pediatrician. 
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN 
Child and infant or child safety seats 
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the 
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the 
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the 
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or 
collision. 
94
Seating and safety restraints 
When installing a child safety seat: 
² Review and follow the information 
presented in the Air Bag 
Supplemental Restraint System 
section in this chapter. 
² Use the correct safety belt buckle 
for that seating position (the 
buckle closest to the direction the 
tongue is coming from). 
² Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle until you hear a 
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the 
buckle. 
² Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety 
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, 
to prevent accidental unbuckling. 
² Place seat back in upright position. 
² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic 
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating 
positions) (if equipped). 
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether 
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable 
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether 
straps, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps. 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included 
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install 
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden 
stop or collision. 
95
Seating and safety restraints 
Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt 
seating positions 
1. Position the child safety seat in a 
seat with a combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If you must 
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move seat all 
the way back. 
An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats 
should never be placed in the front seats, unless passenger air 
bag switch is turned off, See Passenger air bag deactivation switch 
. 
Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front 
seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. 
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt 
and then grasp the shoulder belt 
and lap belt together. 
96
Seating and safety restraints 
3. While holding the shoulder and 
lap belt portions together, route the 
tongue through the child seat 
according to the child seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure 
the belt webbing is not twisted. 
4. Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming 
from) for that seating position until 
you hear and feel the latch engage. 
Make sure the tongue is latched 
securely by pulling on it. 
5. To put the retractor in the 
automatic locking mode, grasp the 
shoulder portion of the belt and pull 
downward until all of the belt is 
extracted and a click is heard. 
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it 
is in the automatic locking mode. 
97
Seating and safety restraints 
7. Pull the lap belt portion across 
the child seat toward the buckle and 
pull up on the shoulder belt while 
pushing down with knee on the 
child seat. 
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to 
remove any slack in the belt. 
9. Before placing the child in the 
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward 
and back to make sure the seat is 
securely held in place. 
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is 
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt 
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 
two through nine. 
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 
98
Seating and safety restraints 
Attaching safety seats with tether straps 
Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether strap that 
goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring 
point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. 
Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about 
ordering a tether strap. 
In Super Cabs equipped with Center Facing Jump Seats, the tether strap 
anchor bracket should be installed only at the center of the cab’s back 
panel with the child seat in the front center seating position. Installing 
an anchor bracket at the right rear of the cab may increase risk of injury 
to an occupant of the right rear center facing jump seat in the event of a 
collision or a sudden stop. If a tether child seat is installed in the right 
front seating position, secure the tether strap to the webbing of the 
buckled right rear lap belt. 
You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the cab inner back panel 
by using a tether anchor kit (613D20) available at no charge from any 
Ford dealer. 
Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. 
Tether anchorage hardware 
Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D20) including 
instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the 
safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be 
injured in a sudden stop or collision. 
99
Starting 
PREPARING TO START YOUR VEHICLE 
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This 
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard 
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio 
noise. 
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator 
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have 
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the 
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high 
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk 
of fire or other damage. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed 
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door 
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in 
this chapter for more instructions. 
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer 
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell 
exhaust fumes. 
Important safety precautions 
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute 
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the 
engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have 
the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 
minutes at high engine RPM. 
Before starting the vehicle: 
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For 
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the 
Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
100
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. 
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: 
² Make sure the parking brake is 
set. 
² Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). 
If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 
² Make sure the parking brake is set. 
² Push the clutch pedal to the 
floor. 
Starting 
3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without 
turning the key to 5 (START). 
4 
If there is difficulty in turning the 
3 
key, firmly rotate the steering wheel 
left and right until the key turns 
freely. This condition may occur 
2 
when: 
² front wheels are turned 
1 
² front wheel is against the curb 
² steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 
5 
101
50 
60 70 
80 
0 0 0 
CHECK 
40 
ENGINE 
F H H H 
30 
20 
60 
80 100 
120 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
20 180 
10 MPH 
100 
140 
160 
km/h 
P R N D 2 1 E L 
ABS 
L L 
SPEED 
CONT 
O/D 
OFF 
90 
110 
120 
! 
BRAKE 
C 
50 
60 70 
40 
80 
90 
0 0 0 
80 100 
120 
DOOR 
AJAR 
CHECK 
GAGE 
H H 
2 
1 
0 
3 
4 5 6 
RPMx1000 
ABS 
CHECK 
ENGINE 
FUEL 
RESET 
<FUEL DOOR 
E 
F 
H 
30 
20 
60 
40 0 0 0 0 0 0 
20 180 
10 MPH 
100 
140 
160 
km/h 
110 
120 
P R N D 2 1 THEFT 
SPEED 
CONT 
4WD 
HIGH 
4WD 
LOW 
L 
O/D 
OFF 
L 
! 
BRAKE 
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate briefly. If a light fails to 
illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. 
² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. 
STARTING THE ENGINE 
1. Turn the key to 5 (START) 
without pressing the accelerator 
pedal and release as soon as the 
4 
engine starts. The key will return to 
3 
4 (ON). 
5 
2. If the temperature is above –12°C 
2 
(10°F) and the engine does not 
start within five seconds on the first 
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 
1 
seconds and try again. 
Starting 
102
Starting 
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not 
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press 
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to 
START position. 
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator 
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake and release the parking 
brake. 
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only) 
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors 
should supply winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol (same as with unleaded 
gasoline). If summer grade (Ed 85) ethanol is used in cold weather 
conditions, you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle or 
hesitation until the engine has warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor 
for the availability of winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol. 
High-quality blends of winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol will produce 
satisfactory cold weather starting and driving results. However, fuel 
composition varies, and sub-optimal winter grade blends could produce 
increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation at temperatures below 
–18 degrees C (0 degrees F). If you experience this condition you may 
find that a different brand of winter grade (Ed 85) (if available in your 
area) improves the performance of your vehicle. 
Cold starting performance can also be improved with the use of an 
engine block heater. The engine block heater is available as a Ford 
option and can also be obtained from your Ford dealer. Consult the 
engine block heater section for proper use of the engine block heater. 
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on (Ed 85) 
ethanol, and neither an alternative brand of (Ed 85) ethanol nor an 
engine block heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your 
tank will improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to 
operate on (Ed 85) ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any 
mixture of the two. 
103
Starting 
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions 
1. Press the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2 of the way to floor and hold. 
2. Turn the key to START position. 
3. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator 
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 
4. If the engine still fails to start, repeat steps one through three. 
5. After the engine starts, hold your foot on the brake pedal, put the 
gearshift lever in gear and release the parking brake. Slowly release the 
brake pedal and drive away in a normal manner. 
Using the engine block heater (if equipped) 
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves 
starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster 
system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly 
recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23°C 
(-10°F) or below. Your engine block heater also comes with a battery 
warmer. The battery warmer wraps around the battery and keeps the 
battery warm when the engine block heater is plugged in. 
For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting 
the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm 
the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the 
vehicle. 
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with 
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) 
adapters. 
104
Starting 
Guarding against exhaust fumes 
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust 
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. 
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, 
have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do 
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and 
could kill you. 
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: 
² the vehicle is raised for service. 
² the sound of the exhaust system changes. 
² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. 
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle 
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of 
California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive 
harm. 
Important ventilating information 
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for 
long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). 
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. 
Improve vehicle ventilation by 
keeping all air inlet vents clear of 
snow, leaves and other debris. 
105
Driving 
BRAKES 
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled 
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. 
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a 
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal 
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent 
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are 
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; 
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be 
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, 
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or 
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings 
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service 
technician. 
Rear anti-lock brake system (RABS) 
Rear Anti-lock Brake System (RABS) is standard equipment on this 
vehicle. RABS is designed to help you maintain directional stability in 
emergency stopping situations. With RABS, the rear brakes are kept from 
locking during panic stops; however, the front wheels can lock because 
they are not controlled by RABS. 
A clicking noise and slight pedal pulsation during RABS braking events 
indicates the RABS is functioning. Pedal pulsation coupled with clicking 
noise while braking under panic conditions on loose gravel, wet or snowy 
roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s RABS. If 
the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel 
while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service 
technician. 
The RABS operates by detecting the onset of rear wheel lockup during 
brake applications and compensating for this tendency. 
RABS warning lamp 
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates 
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not 
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the 
ABS needs to be serviced. 
106
Driving 
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock 
brake system is disabled and normal 
! 
braking is still effective unless the 
BRAKE 
brake warning light also remains 
illuminated with parking brake 
released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle 
serviced immediately.) 
Using RABS 
² In an emergency, applying full pressure may cause the front wheels to 
lock. If the front brakes lock, the vehicle cannot be steered. You 
should apply the brakes with steadily increasing force, as if 
“squeezing” the brakes. If you feel the front wheels begin to lock, 
momentarily release the pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. 
² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with how the RABS 
performs. However, avoid unnecessary risks. 
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped) 
On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise 
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be 
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise 
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or 
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s 
anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder 
in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a 
qualified service technician. 
The ABS operates by detecting the 
onset of wheel lockup during brake 
applications and compensates for 
this tendency. The wheels are 
prevented from locking even when 
the brakes are firmly applied. The 
accompanying illustration depicts 
the advantage of an ABS equipped 
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS 
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking 
traction. 
107
ABS warning lamp ABS 
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates 
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not 
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the 
ABS needs to be serviced. 
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock 
brake system is disabled and normal 
! 
braking is still effective unless the 
BRAKE 
brake warning light also remains 
illuminated with parking brake 
released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle 
serviced immediately.) 
Using ABS 
² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the ABS is 
required, apply continuous force on the brake. The ABS will be 
activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control 
of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you 
to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop. 
² The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply 
the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough 
room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. 
² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking 
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. 
Parking brake 
Apply the parking brake whenever 
BRAKE 
the vehicle is parked. To set the 
RELEASE 
parking brake, press the parking 
brake pedal down until the pedal 
stops. 
Driving 
108
The BRAKE warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster illuminates and 
remains illuminated (when the 
ignition is turned ON) until the 
parking brake is released. 
! 
BRAKE 
Driving 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the 
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic 
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). 
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. 
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop 
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the 
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the 
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 
Pull the release lever to release the 
BRAKE 
brake. Driving with the parking 
RELEASE 
brake on will cause the brakes to 
wear out quickly and reduce fuel 
economy. 
STEERING 
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy 
from the engine to help steer the vehicle. 
To prevent damage to the power steering pump: 
² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left 
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. 
² Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level. 
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned 
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. 
109
Driving 
If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of 
the following: 
² underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) 
² high crown in center of road 
² high crosswinds 
² wheels out of alignment 
² loose or worn components in steering linkage 
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. 
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it 
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special 
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give 
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. 
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and 
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a 
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not 
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more 
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under 
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt 
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in 
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
110
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the 
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. 
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) 
Brake-shift interlock 
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents 
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is 
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. 
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in 
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the 
key. 
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N 
(Neutral). 
3. Start the vehicle. 
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, 
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not 
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside 
emergencies chapter. 
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps 
are working. 
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by 
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a 
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating 
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage 
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may 
overheat. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is 
latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave 
your vehicle. 
Driving 
111
Driving 
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp 
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. 
See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) 
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, 
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever 
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 
Understanding gearshift positions 
P (Park) 
Always come to a complete stop 
before shifting into P (Park). Make 
sure the gearshift lever is securely 
latched in P (Park). This position 
locks the transmission and prevents 
the rear wheels from turning. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift 
lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you 
leave your vehicle. 
R (Reverse) 
With the gearshift in R (Reverse), 
the vehicle will move backward. 
Always come to a complete stop 
before shifting into and out of R 
(Reverse). 
N (Neutral) 
With the gearshift in N (Neutral), 
the vehicle can be started and is 
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal 
down while in this gear. 
112
(Overdrive) 
The normal driving position for the 
best fuel economy. Transmission 
operates in gears one through four. 
(Overdrive) can be deactivated 
by pressing the transmission control 
switch on the gearshift lever. 
The transmission control indicator 
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the 
instrument cluster. 
O/D 
ON/OFF 
O/D 
OFF 
Driving 
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission 
control switch on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in 
the position. The O/D OFF indicator will illuminate on the instrument 
cluster. Transmission operates in gears one through three. (Drive) 
provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: 
² driving with a heavy load. 
² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. 
² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to 
Driving while you tow in the Trailer Towing chapter. 
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control 
switch. The O/D OFF indicator will no longer be illuminated. 
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically 
return to normal overdrive mode. 
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the 
transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in 
overdrive is not desired. 
2 (Second) 
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on 
slippery roads or to provide 
additional engine braking on 
downgrades. Transmission operates 
only in Second gear. 
113
Driving 
1 (First) 
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum 
engine braking on steep 
downgrades. Upshifts can be made 
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to 
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at 
higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will 
shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. 
Forced Downshifts 
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when 
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The 
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first 
gear. 
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) 
Understanding gearshift positions 
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever 
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 
P (Park) 
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, 
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 
Always come to a complete stop 
before shifting into P (Park). Make 
sure the gearshift lever is securely 
latched in P (Park). This position 
locks the transmission and prevents 
the rear wheels from turning. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is 
latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave 
your vehicle. 
114
R (Reverse) 
With the gearshift lever in R 
(Reverse), the vehicle will move 
backward. Always come to a 
complete stop before shifting into 
and out of R (Reverse). 
N (Neutral) 
With the gearshift lever in N 
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started 
and is free to roll. Hold the brake 
pedal down while in this position. 
(Overdrive) 
The normal driving position for the 
best fuel economy. Transmission 
operates in gears one through five. 
(Overdrive) can be deactivated 
by pressing the transmission control 
switch on the end of the gearshift 
lever. 
The transmission control indicator 
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the 
instrument cluster. 
O/D 
ON/OFF 
O/D 
OFF 
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission 
control switch on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in 
the (Overdrive) position. The TCIL will illuminate on the instrument 
cluster. Transmission operates in gears one through four. Drive (O/D 
OFF) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful 
whenever driving conditions (i.e., city traffic, hilly terrain, etc.) cause the 
transmission to excessively shift between (Overdrive) and other 
gears. Deactivate (Overdrive) when: 
² driving with a heavy load. 
² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. 
² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to 
Driving while you tow in the Trailer Towing chapter. 
Driving 
115
Driving 
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control 
switch. The TCIL will no longer be illuminated. 
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically 
return to normal (Overdrive) mode. 
2 (Second) 
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on 
slippery roads or to provide 
additional engine braking on 
downgrades. 
1 (First) 
Use 1 (First) to provide maximum 
engine braking on steep 
downgrades. Upshifts can be made 
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to 
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at 
higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear and will 
shift to 1 (First) after the vehicle decelerates to the proper vehicle 
speed. 
Forced Downshifts 
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when 
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The 
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: fourth, third, second 
or first gear. 
Manual transmission operation (if equipped) 
Using the clutch 
Vehicles equipped with a manual 
transmission have a starter interlock 
that prevents Starting the engine 
unless the clutch pedal is fully 
depressed. 
When starting a vehicle with a 
manual transmission: 
1. Hold down the brake pedal. 
2. Depress the clutch pedal. 
116
3. Put the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). 
4. Start the engine and let it idle for a few seconds. 
² Put the gearshift lever in 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 
5. Release the clutch slowly while pressing gradually down on the 
accelerator pedal. 
² Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Do not use 
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. 
These actions may reduce clutch life. 
Parking 
1. Apply the brake and shift into N 
(Neutral). 
2. Engage the parking brake. 
3. Shift into 1 (First). 
4. Turn the ignition to Off. 
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly 
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake 
fully. 
Driving 
117
Driving 
Recommended shift speeds 
Upshifts when accelerating (for best fuel economy) 
Shift from: 
Transfer case position (if equipped) 
4H 4L 
1 - 2 14 km/h (10 mph) 5 km/h (4 mph) 
2 - 3 32 km/h (22 mph) 11 km/h (9 mph) 
3 -4 50 km/h (33 mph) 19 km/h (13 mph) 
4 - 5 (Overdrive) 71 km/h (41 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 
Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy) 
Transfer case position (if equipped) 
Shift from: 
4H 4L 
1 -2 16 km/h (10 mph) 6 km/h (4 mph) 
2 - 3 26 km/h (19 mph) 10 km/h (8 mph) 
3 - 4 43 km/h (28 mph) 16 km/h (12 mph) 
4 - 5 (Overdrive) 68 km/h (40 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph) 
Maximum downshift speeds 
Shift from: 
Transfer case position (if equipped) 
4H 4L 
5 (Overdrive) - 4 88 km/h (55 mph) 34 km/h (22 mph) 
4 - 3 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (18 mph) 
3 - 2 56 km/h (35 mph) 21 km/h (14 mph) 
2 - 1 32 km/h (20 mph) 11 km/h (8 mph) 
Reverse 
Ensure that the vehicle is at a complete stop before shifting into R 
(Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission. 
Put the gearshift lever into N and wait at least several seconds before 
shifting into R. 
You can shift into R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift lever from 
left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R (Reverse). 
This is a special lockout feature that protects you from accidentally 
shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Overdrive). 
118
Driving 
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. 
When Four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four 
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD power can be selected when 
additional driving power is desired. 
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and the 
instrument panel control is moved to 4WD Low while the vehicle 
is moving, the system will not engage and no damage will occur to 
the 4WD system. Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle 
must be brought to a complete stop with the brake pedal 
depressed and the transmission placed in neutral (or the clutch 
pedal depressed on manual transmissions). 
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could 
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear 
and decreased fuel economy. 
4WD system indicator lights 
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following 
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your 
Ford dealer as soon as possible. 
² 4WD HIGH -momentarily 
illuminates when the vehicle is 
started. Illuminates when 4H 
(4WD High) is engaged. 
² 4WD LOW –momentarily 
4WD 
HIGH 
4WD 
LOW 
illuminates when the vehicle is 
started. Illuminates when 4L 
(4WD Low) is engaged. 
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) 
Positions of the electronic shift system 
2WD (2WD High) – Power to rear axle only. 
4X4 HIGH (4WD High) – Power delivered to front and rear axles for 
increased traction. 
4X4 LOW (4WD Low) – Power to front and rear axles at low speeds. 
119
Shifting from 2WD (2WD high) to 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) 
Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 
HIGH position. 
² At temperatures below 0°C 
(32°F), shifts from 2WD to 4X4 
HIGH should not be performed 
above 72 km/h (45 mph). 
Do not shift into 4X4 HIGH with 
the rear wheels slipping. 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
Shifting from 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) to 2WD (2WD high) 
Move the 4WD control to 2WD 
position at any forward speed. 
² You do not need to operate the 
vehicle in R (Reverse) to 
disengage your front hubs. 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
Shifting from 2WD (2WD high) to 4X4 LOW (4WD low) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress 
the clutch (manual transmission). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 
LOW position. 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
Driving 
120
Driving 
Shifting from 4X4 LOW (4WD low) to 2WD (2WD high) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress 
the clutch (manual transmission). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 
2WD position. 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
Shifting between 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) and 4X4 LOW (4WD low) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress 
the clutch (manual transmission). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 
HIGH or 4X4 LOW position. 
2WD 
4X4 
LOW 
4X4 
HIGH 
Driving off-road with 4WD 
Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and 
rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat 
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. 
121
Driving 
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. 
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel 
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not 
grip the spokes. 
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as 
rocks and stumps. 
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before 
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. For more 
information on driving off-road, read the “Four Wheeling” supplement in 
your owner’s portfolio. 
If your vehicle gets stuck 
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and 
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly 
on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating 
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage 
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may 
overheat. 
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may 
fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 
Sand 
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid 
area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower 
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly 
and avoid spinning the wheels. 
Mud and water 
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake 
capability may be limited. 
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher 
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the 
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. 
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the 
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving 
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. 
122
Driving 
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and 
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an 
imbalance that could damage drive components. 
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, 
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. 
Water intrusion into the transmission may damage the 
transmission. 
Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in 
water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the 
life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or 
changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required. 
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain 
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep 
slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up, 
straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the 
other side of a hill before driving over the crest. 
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting 
to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This 
reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. 
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear 
when added engine braking is desired. 
When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed 
may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load. 
If vehicle speed drops more than 16 km/h (10 mph), the speed control 
will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal. 
If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing 
and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 50 km/h [30 
mph]). 
Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep 
grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of (Overdrive) into 
a lower gear. 
Driving on snow and ice 
A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but 
can skid like any other vehicle. 
123
Driving 
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on 
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting 
from a full stop. 
When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow 
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady 
pressure on the brake pedal. 
Allow more stopping distance and drive slower than usual. Consider 
using one of the lower gears. 
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when 
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the 
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. 
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a 
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in 
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving 
and should not be noticeable to the driver. 
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the 
ground, such as when changing a tire. 
DRIVING THROUGH WATER 
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is 
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition 
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your 
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. 
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very 
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the 
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). 
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop 
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by 
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake 
pedal. 
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is 
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause 
internal transmission damage. 
124
Driving 
VEHICLE LOADING 
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: 
² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard 
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include passengers or 
aftermarket equipment. 
² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, passengers 
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight 
rating minus base curb weight. 
² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload 
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. 
² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum total weight of 
the base vehicle, passengers, optional equipment and cargo. The 
GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety 
Compliance Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle 
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the 
Safety Compliance Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the 
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the trailer. 
² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum combined 
weight of towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the 
trailer. The GCWR indicates the maximum loaded weight that the 
vehicle is designed to tow. 
² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the 
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is 
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/ 
transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer 
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing 
vehicle. 
² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded 
vehicle (including passengers and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is 
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing 
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 
² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must 
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. 
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when 
figuring the total weight. 
125
Driving 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the 
certification label. 
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the 
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do 
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 
The Certification Label, found on the inside pillar of the driver’s door, 
lists several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding 
any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding 
weight to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added 
to the cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve 
capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front 
axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. 
restrict the number of passengers or amount of cargo carried). 
You may add equipment throughout your vehicle if the total weight 
added is equal to or less than the total axle reserve capacity (TARC) 
weight. You should NEVER exceed the total axle reserve capacity. 
Always ensure that the weight of passengers, cargo and equipment being 
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for 
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and Front and rear 
gross axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these 
limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation 
could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. 
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and 
utility-type vehicles 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in 
the Driving chapter of this owner guide. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
126
Driving 
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 
1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) 
chart to find the maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. 
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without 
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping 
company or an inspection station for trucks. 
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the 
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow 
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight 
on the chart. 
TRAILER TOWING 
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum 
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed 
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. 
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so 
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. 
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, 
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these 
components carefully after any towing operation. 
127
Driving 
Trailer towing table (4x2 manual transmission) 
Engine Rear 
axle 
ratio 
Maximum 
GCWR-kg 
(lbs.) 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
(0-maximum) 
Maximum 
frontal area of 
trailer-m2 (ft2) 
Regular Cab 4x2 
2.5L 3.73 2 177 
(4 800) 
0-717 
(0-1 580) 
Equal to frontal 
area of base 
vehicle 
2.5L 4.10 2 177 
(4 800) 
0-717 
(0-1 580) 
Equal to frontal 
area of base 
vehicle 
3.0L 3.73 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-1 207 
(0-2 660) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 
Torsion 
Bar 
Sus-pension 
4.10 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-1 179 
(0-2 600) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.55 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 633 
(0-3 600) 
4.64 
(50) 
SuperCab 4x2 
2.5L 3.73 2 177 
(4 800) 
0-617 
(0-1 360) 
Equal to frontal 
area of base 
vehicle 
2.5L 4.10 2 177 
(4 800) 
0-617 
(0-1 360) 
Equal to frontal 
area of base 
vehicle 
3.0L 3.73 2 271 
(6 000) 
0-1 116 
(0-2 460) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.55 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 542 
(0-3 400) 
4.64 
(50) 
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 
ft.) elevation. 
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier 
in this chapter. 
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular 
vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. 
128
Driving 
Trailer towing table (4x2 manual transmission) 
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the 
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and 
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating 
(GCWR). 
Trailer tow table (4x4 manual transmission) 
Engine Rear 
axle 
ratio 
Maximum 
GCWR-kg 
(lbs.) 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
Maximum 
frontal area of 
trailer-m2 (ft2) 
Regular Cab 
3.0L 3.73 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-1 089 
(0-2 400) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 4.10 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-1 089 
(0-2 400) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.73 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 515 
(0-3 340) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 4.10 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 515 
(0-3 340) 
4.64 
(50) 
SuperCab 
3.0L 3.73 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-998 
(0-2 200) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 4.10 2 721 
(6 000) 
0-998 
(0-2 200) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.73 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 433 
(0-3 160) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 4.10 3 175 
(7 000) 
0-1 433 
(0-3 160) 
4.64 
(50) 
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 
ft.) of elevation. 
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier 
in this chapter. 
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see 
Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. 
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed 
towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded 
trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). 
129
Driving 
Trailer towing table (4x2 automatic transmission) 
Engine Rear 
axle 
ratio 
Maximum 
GCWR-kg 
(lbs.) 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
(0-maximum) 
Maximum 
frontal area of 
trailer-m2 (ft2) 
Regular Cab 4x2 
2.5L 4.10 2 494 
(5 500) 
0-989 
(2 180) 
Equal to frontal 
area of base 
vehicle 
3.0L 3.73 3 401 
(7 500) 
0-1 869 
(0-4 120) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 
Torsion 
Bar 
Suspension 
4.10 3 401 
(7 500) 
0-1 842 
(0-4 060) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.55 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 749 
(0-6 060) 
4.64 
(50) 
SuperCab 4x2 
3.0L 3.73 3 401 
(7 500) 
0-1 778 
(0-3 920) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.55 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 658 
(0-5 860) 
4.64 
(50) 
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 
ft.) elevation. 
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier 
in this chapter. 
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular 
vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. 
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the 
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and 
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating 
(GCWR). 
130
Driving 
Trailer tow table (4x4 automatic transmission) 
Engine Rear 
axle 
ratio 
Maximum 
GCWR-kg 
(lbs.) 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
Maximum 
frontal area of 
trailer-m2 (ft2) 
Regular Cab 
3.0L 3.73 3 401 
(7 500) 
0-1 751 
(0-3 860) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 4.10 3 628 
(8 000) 
0-1 978 
(0-4 360) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.73 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 631 
(0-5 800) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 4.10 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 631 
(0-5 800) 
4.64 
(50) 
SuperCab 
3.0L 3.73 3 401 
(7 500) 
0-1 660 
(0-3 660) 
4.64 
(50) 
3.0L 4.10 3 628 
(8 000) 
0-1 887 
(0-4 160) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 3.73 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 549 
(5 620) 
4.64 
(50) 
4.0L 4.10 4 309 
(9 500) 
0-2 549 
(0-5 620) 
4.64 
(50) 
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 
ft.) of elevation. 
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier 
in this chapter. 
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see 
Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. 
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the 
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and 
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating 
(GCWR). 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the 
certification label. 
131
Driving 
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer 
weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, 
structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. 
Preparing to tow 
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is 
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer 
dealer if you require assistance. 
Hitches 
For towing trailers up to 907 kg (2 000 lb), use a weight carrying hitch 
and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the 
underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distrubuting hitch for 
trailers over 907 kg (2 000 lb). 
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch 
which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if 
they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable 
rental agency. 
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all 
mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious 
gases or water from entering. 
Safety chains 
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers 
of the vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains 
under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. 
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency 
gives to you. 
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. 
Trailer brakes 
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are 
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s 
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal 
regulations. 
132
Driving 
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your 
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough 
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. 
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the 
GVWR not GCWR. 
Trailer lamps 
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your 
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or 
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking 
up trailer lamps. 
Using a step bumper 
The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires 
only a ball with a 19 mm (3/4 inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 
907 kg (2 000 lb.) trailer weight and 91 kg (200 lb.) tongue weight 
capability. 
The rated capcities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the 
factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed 
directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either 
lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will 
significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This 
can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use 
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse. 
Trailer tow connector 
The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the 
driver’s side of the vehicle. 
Refer to the following chart for 
information regarding the 
factory-equipped trailer tow 
connector: 1 
2 
3 
4 
133
Driving 
Trailer tow connector 
Color Function Comment 
1. Dark Green Trailer right 
hand turn signal 
Circuit activated when brake 
pedal is depressed or when 
ignition is on and right hand turn 
signal is applied. 
2. Yellow Trailer left hand 
turn signal 
Circuit activated when brake 
pedal is depressed or when 
ignition is on and left hand turn 
signal is applied. 
3. Tan/White Tail lamp Relay controlled circuit activated 
when the park lamps/headlamps 
are on. 
4. White Ground Matching vehicle circuit returns to 
battery’s negative ground. 
Driving while you tow 
When towing a trailer: 
² Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may 
shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. 
² Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. 
² Use a lower gear when towing up or down steep hills. This will 
eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel 
economy and transmission cooling. 
² Anticipate stops and brake gradually. 
Exceeding the GCWR rating may cause internal transmission 
damage and void your warranty coverage. 
Servicing after towing 
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more 
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance guide 
for more information. 
Trailer towing tips 
² Practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area before starting on 
a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, 
make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other 
obstacles. 
134
Driving 
² Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. 
² The trailer tongue weight should be no more than 10–15% of the 
loaded trailer weight. 
² After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your 
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. 
² When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place 
the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmissions) or N (Neutral) 
(manual transmissions). This aids engine cooling and air conditioner 
efficiency. 
² Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must 
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. 
Launching or retrieving a boat 
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval, 
² Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of 
the rear bumper and 
² Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the 
bottom edge of the rear bumper. 
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle 
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions, reliability and 
causing internal transmission damage. 
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the axle has been submerged in 
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed 
unless a leak is suspected or repair required. 
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the 
water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed 
from the water. 
135
Driving 
Recreational towing 
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An 
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a 
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your 
transmission is not damaged. 
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles equipped with manual transmissions 
Before you have your vehicle towed: 
² Release the parking brake. 
² Move the gearshift to N (Neutral). 
² Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. 
² The maximum recommended speed is 88 km/h (55 mph). 
² The maximum recommended distance is unlimited. 
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions 
provided by the after market manufacturer of the towing 
apparatus if one has been installed. 
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions 
For all cars, 4x2 truck/sports utility with automatic transmissions, or 4x4 
truck/sport utility with manual transfer cases and automatic 
transmissions, follow these guidelines for recreational towing: 
² Release the parking brake. 
² Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. 
² Place the transmission in N (Neutral). 
² Do not exceed a distance of 80 km (50 miles). 
² Do not exceed 56 km/h (35 mph) vehicle speed. 
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must 
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the 
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your 
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. 
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause 
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal 
transmission components. 
CAMPER BODIES 
Your Ranger Pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies. 
136
Roadside emergencies 
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford offers a 
complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate 
from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: 
² 24–hours, seven days a week 
² for the Basic warranty period (Canada) or New Vehicle Limited 
Warranty period (U.S.) of three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), 
whichever comes first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 
80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles 
Roadside assistance will cover: 
² changing a flat tire 
² jump-starts 
² lock-out assistance 
² fuel delivery 
² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford dealership, or your 
selling dealer if within 25 kms (15.5 miles) of the nearest Ford 
Dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related 
tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered 
(some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). 
Using roadside assistance 
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your 
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the 
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is 
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, it is found in 
the Roadside Assistance book in the glove compartment. 
To receive roadside assistance in the United States for Ford or Mercury 
vehicles, call 1-800-241-3673 or if you own a Lincoln vehicle, call 
1–800–521–4140. In Canada call 1–800–665–2006. 
Should you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford will 
reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain information about 
reimbursement, call 1-800-241-3673 in the United States for Ford or 
Mercury vehicles; or if you own a Lincoln vehicle, call 1–800–521–4140. 
Call 1–800–665–2006 in Canada. 
137
Roadside emergencies 
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty 
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance 
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting 
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Similarly in Canada, you may purchase additional coverage beyond the 
basic coverage period by consulting the Ford Roadside Assistance Club 
brochure or by calling 1–877–294–CLUB (1–877–894–2582). 
HAZARD FLASHER 
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, 
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the 
ignition is off. 
² The hazard lights control is 
located on top of the steering 
column. 
² Depress hazard lights control to 
activate all hazard flashers 
simultaneously. 
² Depress control again to turn the 
flashers off. 
RESETTING THE FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH 
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric 
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. 
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump 
shut-off switch may have been activated. The “Fuel Reset” indicator light 
will illuminate in the instrument cluster. 
138
The fuel pump shut-off switch is 
located in the passenger’s foot well, 
by the kick panel. 
Roadside emergencies 
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 
2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by 
pushing in on the reset button. 
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and 
return the key to the OFF position. 
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 
139
Roadside emergencies 
FUSES AND RELAYS 
Fuses 
If electrical components in the 
vehicle are not working, a fuse may 
have blown. Blown fuses are 
identified by a broken wire within 
the fuse. Check the appropriate 
fuses before replacing any electrical 
components. 
15 
Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage 
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause 
severe wire damage and could start a fire. 
Standard fuse amperage rating and color 
COLOR 
Fuse 
Rating 
Mini 
Fuses 
Standard 
Fuses 
Maxi 
Fuses 
Cartridge 
Maxi 
Fuses 
Fuse Link 
Cartridge 
2A Grey Grey — — — 
3A Violet Violet — — — 
4A Pink Pink — — — 
5A Tan Tan — — — 
7.5A Brown Brown — — — 
10A Red Red — — — 
15A Blue Blue — — — 
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 
25A Natural Natural — — — 
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 
40A — — Orange Green Green 
50A — — Red Red Red 
60A — — Blue — Yellow 
70A — — Tan — Brown 
80A — — Natural — Black 
140
Passenger compartment fuse panel 
The fuse panel is located on the left 
hand side of the instrument panel 
facing the driver’s side door. Pull the 
panel cover outward to access the 
fuses. 
Roadside emergencies 
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel 
cover. 
1 2 3 4 
5 6 7 8 
9 10 11 12 
13 14 15 16 
17 18 19 20 
21 22 23 24 
25 26 
29 30 
35 
36 
31 32 
34 
33 
27 28 
141
Roadside emergencies 
The fuses are coded as follows: 
Fuse/Relay 
Fuse Amp 
Location 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment 
Fuse Panel Description 
1 7.5A Power Mirror Switch 
2 7.5A Blower Motor Relay, PAD Module, Air Bag 
Diagnostic Monitor 
3 7.5A Left Stop/Turn Trailer Tow Connector 
4 10A Left Headlamp 
5 — Not Used 
6 15A Overdrive, Back-up Lamps, DRL, 4x4 
7 7.5A Right Stop/Turn Trailer Tow Connector 
8 10A Right Headlamp, Fog Lamp Relay 
9 7.5A Brake Pedal Position Switch 
10 7.5A Speed Control Servo/Amplifier Assembly, 
Generic Electronic Module (GEM), Shift 
Lock Actuator, Blend Door Actuator, 
A/C-Heater Assembly, Turn Signals 
11 7.5A Instrument Cluster, Daytime Running 
Lights (DRL), RABS Resistor 
12 — Not Used 
13 20A Brake Pedal Position Switch 
14 20A or 10A 20A: If equipped with Rear Anti-Lock Brake 
System (RABS) Module. 
10A: If equipped with 4 Wheel Anti-Lock 
Brake System (4WABS) Module, 4WABS 
Main Relay 
15 7.5A Air Bag Indicator Lamp, Alternator 
Indicator Lamp 
16 30A Windshield Wiper Motor, Wiper Hi-Lo Relay, 
Wiper Run/Park Relay 
17 25A Cigar Lighter, Data Link Connector (DLC) 
18 15A Driver’s Unlock Relay, All-Unlock Relay, 
All-Lock Relay 
19 25A PCM Power Diode, Ignition, PATS 
20 7.5A RAP Module, Generic Electronic Module 
(GEM), Radio 
142
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment 
Fuse Panel Description 
21 15A Flasher (Hazard) 
22 20A Auxiliary Power Socket 
23 — Not Used 
24 7.5A Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch, Starter 
Interrupt Relay, Anti-Theft 
25 — Not Used 
26 10A Battery Saver Relay, Electronic Shift Relay, 
Interior Lamp Relay, Power Window Relay, 
Electronic Shift Control Module, Dome/Map 
Lamp, GEM, Instrument Cluster 
27 — Not Used 
28 7.5A Generic Electronic Module (GEM), Radio 
29 15A Radio 
30 10A RABS Test Connector 
31 — Not Used 
32 — Not Used 
33 15A Headlamps, Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 
Module, Instrument Cluster 
34 — Not Used 
35 — Not Used 
36 — Not Used 
Roadside emergencies 
143
Roadside emergencies 
Power distribution box 
The power distribution box is 
located in the engine compartment. 
The power distribution box contains 
high-current fuses that protect your 
vehicle’s main electrical systems 
from overloads. 
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current 
fuses. 
Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before 
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. 
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the 
Battery section of the Maintenance and care chapter. 
144
The high-current fuses are coded as follows: 
Fuse/Relay 
Fuse Amp 
Location 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box Description 
1 50A** I/P Fuse Panel 
2 40A** Blower Motor Relay 
3 50A** 4 Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) 
Module 
4 20A** Power Windows 
5 50A** Ignition Switch, Starter Relay 
1 10A* A/C Relay 
2 — Not Used 
3 20A* Electronic Shift Relay and Electronic Shift 
Control Module 
4 20A* Fog Lamp and Daytime Running Lamps 
5 15A Trailer Tow Park Lamps 
6 10A* Powertrain Control Module 
7 30A* 4 Wheel Anti-lock Brake System (4WABS) 
Module 
8 30A* PCM Relay 
5 4 3 2 1 
12 11 10 9 
8 7 6 5 
4 3 2 1 
15 14 13 
9 
6 
10 
8 
7 
5 
2 1 1 
4 
1 
3 2 
125 
MEGAFUSE 
11 
13 
12 
14 
Roadside emergencies 
145
Roadside emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box Description 
9 20A* Fuel Pump Relay and RAP Module 
10 15A* Horn Relay 
11 15A* Parklamps Relay and Main Light Switch 
12 30A* Main Light Switch and Multifunction Switch 
13 15A* Heated Oxygen Sensor, EGR Vacuum 
Regulator, EVR Solenoid, Camshaft Position 
Sensor (CMP), Canister Vent Solenoid 
14 30A* Alternator Voltage Regulator 
15 — Not Used 
1 — Wiper Park Relay 
2 — A/C Relay 
3 — Wiper Hi/Lo Relay 
4 — PCM Power Relay 
5 — Fuel Pump Relay 
6 — Starter Relay 
7 — Horn Relay 
8 — Fog Lamp Control Relay 
9 — Blower Motor Relay 
10 — Foglamp Isolation Relay 
11 — Not Used 
12 — Not Used 
13 — Park Lamp/Trailer Tow Relay 
14 — Washer Pump Relay 
1 — RABS Resistor 
1 — RABS Diode 
2 — Electronic Engine Controls Diode 
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses 
146
Roadside emergencies 
CHANGING THE TIRES 
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. 
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly 
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. 
Temporary spare tire information 
Your vehicle may have a temporary or conventional spare tire. The 
temporary spare tire for your vehicle is labeled as such. It is smaller than 
a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Replace this tire 
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. 
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with 
a temporary spare. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above 
speeds of 16 km/h (10 mph) or for distances above 80 km (50 miles). 
If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow 
these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control 
of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. 
When driving with the temporary spare tire do not: 
² exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) under any circumstances 
² load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the 
Safety Compliance Label 
² tow a trailer 
² use tire chains 
² drive through an automatic car wash, because of the vehicle’s reduced 
ground clearance 
² try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its wheel 
² use the wheel for any other type of vehicle 
Conventional spare tire information 
If you have the conventional spare tire, you can use it as a spare or a 
regular tire. The spare is identical to the other tires on your vehicle, 
although the wheel may not match. 
147
Roadside emergencies 
Location of the spare tire and tools 
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following 
locations: 
Tool Location 
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear 
bumper 
Jack, jack handle, 
wheel nut wrench 
Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the 
jack and tools cover 
SuperCab: stowed in the passenger side rear 
cab compartment or behind the jump seat in a 
separate tool bag 
Four-door models: stowed behind the front 
seats, between jump seats and underneath 
jack and tools cover. 
Key, spare tire lock (if 
equipped) 
In the glove box 
Removing the spare tire 
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the 
illustrations. 
When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following: 
² one handle extension and one 
typical extension. To assemble, 
slide parts together. To 
disconnect, depress button and 
pull apart. 
² one wheel nut wrench. Depress 
button and slide together. 
148
2. If equipped, unlock and remove 
the spare tire carrier lock from the 
rear access hole located just above 
the rear bumper and below the 
tailgate. 
Roadside emergencies 
3. Insert the straight end of the jack 
handle into the rear access hole 
located just above the rear bumper 
and below the tailgate. 
Forward motion will stop and 
resistance to turning will be felt 
when properly engaged. 
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise 
until tire is lowered to the ground 
and the cable is slightly slack. 
5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. 
Stowing the spare tire 
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 
2. Install the retainer through the 
wheel center and slide the wheel 
under the vehicle. 
3. Turn the spare handle clockwise 
until the tire is raised to its original 
position underneath the vehicle. The 
spare handle ratchets when the tire 
is raised to the stowed position. It 
will not allow you to overtighten. 
149
Roadside emergencies 
4. If your vehicle is equipped with P265/75 R15 AT tires, do not stow a 
flat or inflated full size spare tire in the spare tire carrier. The flat full 
size tire should be stowed and tied down in the pickup box bed until it 
can be repaired. 
5. If removed, install the spare tire carrier lock on the access hole above 
the bumper. 
Tire change procedure 
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be 
sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the 
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to 
the tire being changed. 
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be 
seriously injured. 
1. Park on a level surface, activate 
hazard flashers and place gearshift 
lever in P (Park) (automatic 
transmission) or 1 (First) (manual 
transmission). 
2. Set the parking brake and turn 
engine OFF. 
3. Block the diagonally opposite 
wheel. 
150
4. Insert tapered end of the lug 
wrench behind hub caps and twist 
them off. 
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut 
one-half turn counterclockwise but 
do not remove them until the wheel 
is raised off the ground. 
6. Position the jack according to the 
following guides and turn the jack 
handle clockwise until the tire is a 
maximum of 25 mm (1 inch) off the ground. 
² Front 
² Rear 
Roadside emergencies 
151
Roadside emergencies 
To lessen the risk of 
personal injury, do not put 
any part of your body under the 
vehicle while changing a tire. Do 
not start the engine when your 
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is 
only meant for changing the tire. 
² Never use the differential as a 
jacking point. 
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug wrench. 
8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is 
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the 
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 
9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 
10. Remove the jack and fully 
1 
tighten the lug nuts in the order 
shown. 
11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to 
Stowing the spare tire. 
3 4 
12. Stow the jack and lug wrench. 
Make sure the jack is fastened so it 
does not rattle when you drive. 
5 2 
13. Unblock the wheels. 
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, 
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or 
vehicle damage. 
Do not push start your vehicle. You could damage the catalytic 
converter. 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and 
clothing, if contacted. 
152
Roadside emergencies 
Do not attempt to push start your vehicle. Automatic 
transmissions do not have push-start capability. 
Preparing your vehicle 
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could 
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle 
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on 
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving 
parts. 
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before 
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical 
surges. Turn all other accessories off. 
Connecting the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of 
the discharged battery. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the 
assisting (boosting) battery. 
153
+ 
– 
Roadside emergencies 
+ 
– 
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 
terminal of the assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the 
assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed 
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the 
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker 
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. 
154
Roadside emergencies 
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) 
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an 
explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of 
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. 
Jump starting 
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at 
moderately increased speed. 
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an 
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 
Removing the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were 
connected. 
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. 
155
+ 
– 
Roadside emergencies 
+ 
– 
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the 
booster vehicle’s battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster 
vehicle’s battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the 
disabled vehicle’s battery. 
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables 
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can 
relearn its idle conditions. 
156
WRECKER TOWING 
Roadside emergencies 
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing 
service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. 
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed 
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not 
approved a slingbelt towing procedure. 
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels 
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground. 
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a 
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the 
ground. 
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle 
damage may occur. 
Ford Motor Company provides a towing manual for all authorized tow 
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for 
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 
157
Maintenance and care 
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS 
To help you service your vehicle: 
² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy 
location. 
² We provide a Scheduled Maintenance Guide which makes tracking 
routine service easy. 
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide 
necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Guide” to find out 
which parts and services are covered. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts 
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to 
provide the best performance in your vehicle. 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. 
² Do not work on a hot engine. 
² When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or 
long hair does not get caught up in moving parts. 
² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed 
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. 
² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from 
the battery and all fuel related parts. 
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle 
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in Battery 
in this chapter. 
Working with the engine off 
² Automatic transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
² Manual transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake. 
2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 
158
3. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Working with the engine on 
² Automatic transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do 
not remove it while the engine is running. 
² Manual transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N 
(Neutral). 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do 
not remove it while the engine is running. 
OPENING THE HOOD 
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood 
release handle located under the 
bottom of the instrument panel. 
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 
release the auxiliary latch that is 
located under the front center of 
the hood. 
3. Lift the hood and support it with 
the prop rod. 
Maintenance and care 
159
Maintenance and care 
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 
2.5L I4 engine 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
11 
10 9 8 
1. Engine coolant reservoir 
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 
4. Engine oil dipstick 
5. Brake fluid reservoir 
6. Power distribution box 
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 
8. Battery 
9. Power steering fluid reservoir 
10. Engine oil filler cap 
11. Air filter assembly 
160
3.0L V6 engine 
Maintenance and care 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
11 10 9 
1. Engine coolant reservoir 
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
3. Engine oil filler cap 
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 
5. Engine oil dipstick 
6. Brake fluid reservoir 
7. Power distribution box 
8. Clutch fluid reservoir 
9. Battery 
10. Power steering fluid reservoir 
11. Air filter assembly 
8 
161
Maintenance and care 
4.0L OHV V6 engine 
11 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 
10 9 
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
2. Engine oil filler cap 
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 
4. Engine oil dipstick 
5. Power steering fluid reservoir 
6. Brake fluid reservoir 
7. Power distribution box 
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 
9. Battery 
10. Air filter assembly 
11. Engine coolant reservoir 
162
Maintenance and care 
ENGINE OIL 
Checking the engine oil 
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the appropriate intervals 
for checking the engine oil. 
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the 
oil pan. 
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions). 
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 
5. Locate and carefully remove the 
engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 
ADD 1QT FULL 
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it 
again. 
² If the oil level is between the ADD and FULL marks or between 
the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil 
level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. 
MIN MAX 
163
Maintenance and care 
² If the oil level is below the ADD 
mark or MIN mark, add enough 
oil to raise the level within the 
ADD-FULL range or MIN-MAX 
range. 
² Oil levels above the letter F in FULL or the MAX mark may cause 
engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a 
service technician. 
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. 
Adding engine oil 
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine 
oil in this chapter. 
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified 
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap 
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the 
MAX mark or the letter F in FULL on the engine oil level indicator 
(dipstick). 
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 
until three clicks can be heard. 
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the 
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 
164
Maintenance and care 
Engine oil and filter recommendations 
Look for this certification 
trademark. 
Use SAE 5W-30 motor oil certified for gasoline engines by the American 
Petroleum Institute (API). 
Motor oil displaying the API certification trademark will meet all 
requirements for your vehicle’s engine. 
Ford oil specification is WSS-M2C153-G. 
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine 
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, 
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. 
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule 
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. 
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for 
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used 
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up 
engine noises or knock may be experienced. 
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or 
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 
165
Maintenance and care 
BRAKE FLUID 
Checking and adding brake fluid 
Brake fluid should be checked and 
refilled as needed. Refer to the 
Scheduled Maintenance Guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
1. Clean the reservoir cap before 
removal to prevent dirt or water 
from entering the reservoir. 
2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 
3. If necessary, add brake fluid from 
a clean un-opened container until 
the level reaches MAX. Do not fill 
MAX 
above this line. 
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid 
certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications 
in the Capacities and specifications chapter. 
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes 
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if 
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. 
Seek medical attention immediately. 
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause 
permanent damage to your brakes. 
Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This 
may cause the brakes to fail. 
166
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) 
Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide 
for the service interval schedules. 
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should 
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step 
in the reservoir. 
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications. Refer 
to Capacities and specifications. 
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes 
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical if irritation 
persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek 
medical attention immediately. 
1. Clean the reservoir cap before 
removal to prevent dirt and water 
from entering the reservoir. 
2. Remove cap and rubber 
diaphragm from reservoir. 
3. Add fluid until the level reaches 
the step in the reservoir. 
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and 
cap onto reservoir. 
Maintenance and care 
167
Maintenance and care 
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID 
Checking and adding washer fluid 
Check the washer fluid whenever 
you stop for fuel. The reservoir is 
highlighted with a symbol. 
If the level is low, add enough fluid 
to fill the reservoir. In very cold 
weather, do not fill the reservoir all 
the way. 
WASHER FLUID 
ONLY 
RADIATOR 
COOLANT 
ONLY 
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to 
Lubricant specifications in the Capacities and specifications chapter. 
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the 
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. 
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used 
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the 
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. 
Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer 
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling 
system components. 
ENGINE COOLANT 
Checking engine coolant 
Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture 
of distilled water and Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in 
Canada, Motorcraft CXC-10), or an equivalent premium engine coolant 
that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. 
168
Maintenance and care 
A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Ford Premium Engine Coolant 
provides: 
² maximum cooling system efficiency. 
² freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). 
² boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). 
² protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. 
² an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant gauge. 
The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level 
and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid 
level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to 
the engine and cooling system may result. 
When the engine is cold, check the 
level of the engine coolant in the 
reservoir. 
RADIATOR 
COOLANT 
ONLY 
² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold 
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon 
application). 
² Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval 
schedules. 
² Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your 
vehicle in this chapter. 
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, 
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is 
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding 
engine coolant in this chapter. 
169
Maintenance and care 
Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine 
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its 
specified function and vehicle location. 
Adding engine coolant 
Use only Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in 
Canada, Motorcraft CXC-10) or a premium engine coolant that 
meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. 
² DO NOT USE Ford Extended Life Engine Coolant 
F6AZ-19544-AA (orange in color). 
² DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLt engine coolant or an equivalent 
engine coolant that meets Ford specification WSS-M97B44-D. 
² DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine 
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. 
² DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. 
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system. 
² DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant 
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm 
your engine’s cooling system. 
² The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling 
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s 
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant 
your vehicle requires, contact your local dealer. 
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid 
reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield, it 
could make it difficult to see through the windshield. 
When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir, until the coolant is at the 
“cold fill level” or within the “ cold fill range” as listed in the engine 
coolant reservoir (depending upon application). 
² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. 
² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. 
² Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will 
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
170
Maintenance and care 
Plain water may be added in an emergency, but you must replace it with 
a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. 
Check the coolant level in the reservoir before you drive your vehicle the 
next few times (with the engine cool). If necessary, add a 50/50 
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant 
reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” or within the 
“cold fill range” as listed on the reservoir (depending upon application). 
Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have 
to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month. 
To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being released from 
the engine cooling system, never remove the radiator cap while 
the engine is running or hot. Failure to follow this warning may result 
in damage to the engine’s cooling system and possible severe personal 
injury. 
If you must remove the radiator cap, follow these steps to avoid personal 
injury: 
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. 
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly 
turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release. 
3. Step back while the pressure releases. 
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the 
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 
Recycled engine coolant 
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant 
produced by Ford-approved processes. 
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Ford 
specification ESE-M97B44-A. Use of a recycled engine coolant which 
does not meet the Ford specification may harm engine and cooling 
system components. 
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. 
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and 
disposing of automotive fluids. 
171
Maintenance and care 
Coolant refill capacity 
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer 
to Refill capacities in the Capacities and specifications chapter. 
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant 
in this chapter. 
Severe climates 
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): 
² it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration 
above 50%. 
² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. 
² increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will 
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the 
winter months. 
If you drive in extremely hot climates: 
² it is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration 
above 40%. 
² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. 
² decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
protection at the temperatures in which you drive. 
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system 
and engine protection. 
172
Maintenance and care 
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID 
Check the power steering fluid. 
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance 
Guide for the service interval 
schedules. If adding fluid is 
necessary, use only MERCONt ATF. 
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating 
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be 
near the center of the normal area between H and C). 
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several 
times. 
3. Turn the engine off. 
4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows 
in the FULL HOT range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking 
the level until it reaches the FULL HOT range. Be sure to put the 
dipstick back in the reservoir. 
TRANSMISSION FLUID 
Checking automatic transmission fluid 
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for 
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. 
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not 
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you 
notice some sign of fluid leakage. 
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an 
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating 
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been 
173
Maintenance and care 
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot 
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, 
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear 
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If 
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment 
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in 
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient 
temperature. 
Low fluid level 
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid 
level is at the bottom of the dipstick 
and the ambient temperature is 
above 10°C (50°F). 
Correct fluid level 
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating 
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal 
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 
miles) of driving. 
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is 
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill 
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at normal operating 
temperature (66°C-77°C 
[150°F-170°F]). 
174
Maintenance and care 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at ambient temperature 
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). 
High fluid level 
Fluid levels above the safe range 
may result in transmission failure. 
An overfill condition of transmission 
fluid may cause shift and/or 
engagement concerns and/or 
possible damage. 
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. 
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels 
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of 
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the 
Lubricant specifications section in the Capacities and specifications 
chapter. 
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause 
internal transmission component damage. 
If necessary, add fluid in 250 mL (1/2 pint) increments through the filler 
tube until the level is correct. 
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid 
should be removed by a qualified 
technician. 
An overfill condition of 
transmission fluid may cause 
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. 
175
Maintenance and care 
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid 
1. Clean the filler plug. 
2. Remove the filler plug and 
inspect the fluid level. 
3. Fluid level should be at bottom of 
the opening. 
4. Add enough fluid through the 
filler opening so that the fluid level 
is at the bottom of the opening. 
5. Install and tighten the fill plug 
securely. 
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities 
and specifications chapter. 
176
Maintenance and care 
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped) 
1. Clean the filler plug. 
2. Remove the filler plug and 
inspect the fluid level. 
3. Add only enough fluid through 
the filler opening so that the fluid 
level is at the bottom of the 
opening. 
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities 
and specifications chapter. 
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE 
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require 
lubrication. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for maintenance 
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints 
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. 
177
Maintenance and care 
BATTERY 
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery 
which normally does not require 
additional water during its life of 
service. 
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the 
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. 
Do not overfill the battery cells. 
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water 
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high 
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery 
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the 
charging system checked. 
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled 
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. 
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and 
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to 
the battery terminals. 
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables 
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the 
acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 
178
Maintenance and care 
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause 
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted 
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, 
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper 
ventilation. 
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the 
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, 
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. 
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite 
corners. 
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric 
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes 
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of 
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush 
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt 
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. 
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, 
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When 
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must 
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and 
performance. To begin this process: 
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral 
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the 
engine. 
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. 
² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to 
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 
179
Maintenance and care 
² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle 
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle 
trim is eventually relearned. 
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, 
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is 
reconnected. 
² Always dispose of automotive 
batteries in a responsible manner. 
Follow your local authorized 
standards for disposal. Call your 
local authorized recycling center 
to find out more about recycling 
automotive batteries. 
LEAD 
RETURN 
RECYCLE 
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES 
Check the wiper blades at least twice a year or when they seem less 
effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used 
by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. 
Checking the wiper blades 
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and 
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild 
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the 
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. 
180
Changing the wiper blades 
To replace the wiper blades: 
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the 
windshield and lock into the service 
position. 
2. Turn the blade at an angle from 
the wiper arm. Push the lock pin 
manually to release the blade and 
pull the wiper blade down toward 
the windshield to remove it from the 
arm. 
3. Attach the new wiper to the 
wiper arm and press it into place 
until a click is heard. 
Maintenance and care 
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING 
New vehicles are fitted with tires 
that have a rating on them called 
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality 
grades can be found where 
applicable on the tire sidewall 
between tread shoulder and 
maximum section width. For 
example: 
² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United 
States Department of Transportation has set. 
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger 
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, 
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim 
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in 
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. 
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following 
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. 
181
Maintenance and care 
Treadwear 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of 
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified 
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire 
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual 
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and 
differences in road characteristics and climate. 
Traction AA A B C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those 
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured 
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of 
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction 
performance. 
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on 
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include 
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 
Temperature A B C 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the 
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire 
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance 
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle 
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of 
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by 
law. 
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that 
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in 
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 
182
Maintenance and care 
SERVICING YOUR TIRES 
Checking the tire pressure 
² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. 
² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been 
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 
miles). 
² Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the 
Certification Label. 
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail 
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. 
Tire rotation 
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear 
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate 
them as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. If you notice 
that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. 
The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear 
wheels, if your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is 
recommended that only the front wheels be rotated (side to side). 
² Four tire rotation 
183
Maintenance and care 
² Five tire rotation 
Replacing the tires 
Replace the tires when the wear 
band is visible through the tire 
treads. 
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or 
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the 
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed 
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations 
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, 
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. 
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, 
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), 
as originally offered by Ford. 
184
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger 
size tires. 
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the 
handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose 
control and roll over. 
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also 
affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS 
Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of 
vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods 
of time may result in damage to vehicle components. 
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you 
currently have on your vehicle. 
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in 
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow 
tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains,it is 
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and 
specifications as those originally installed. 
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: 
² Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the 
wheels. 
² Use only SAE Class S chains. 
² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any 
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. 
² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your 
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove 
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. 
² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. 
² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use 
tire chains on dry roads. 
Maintenance and care 
185
Maintenance and care 
² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle 
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when 
using snow tires and chains. 
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS 
Important safety precautions 
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank 
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel system to work improperly in a collision, which may result in 
possible personal injury. 
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or 
mishandled. 
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a 
cancer-causing agent. 
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: 
² Extinguish all smoking materials 
and any open flames before 
fueling your vehicle. 
² Always turn off the vehicle before 
fueling. 
² Automotive fuels can be harmful 
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such 
as gasoline and ethanol are highly 
toxic and if swallowed can cause 
186
Maintenance and care 
death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician 
immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic 
effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. 
² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind 
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, 
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious 
illness and permanent injury. 
² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, 
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and 
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could 
lead to permanent injury. 
² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is 
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated 
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or 
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. 
² Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of 
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or 
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In 
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If 
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap 
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an 
adverse reaction. 
² FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent or more of ethanol. 
Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the 
same as “Fuel Ethanol (E85)”. 
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer 
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn 
and sugar cane. When ethanol is used in the making of motor fuels, a 
small amount of a bad tasting chemical is added to discourage beverage 
use. The resulting fuel is called Ed 100 meaning 100% pure ethanol 
diluted by 2% to 5% gasoline as the “denaturant.” 
Fuel ethanol (Ed 85) is then made by adding 15% more unleaded 
gasoline. The resulting fuel also has a higher octane rating than unleaded 
regular gasoline and other properties which allow engine designs with 
greater efficiency and power. 
Winter blends may contain up to 30% unleaded gasoline (25% plus the 
denaturant) to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold weather may 
require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to Cold Weather 
Starting in the Starting chapter. 
187
Maintenance and care 
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals 
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or 
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special 
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles 
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers. 
Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel 
components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle is not 
serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures, damage 
may occur and your warranty may be invalidated. 
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow 
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while 
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. 
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static 
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an 
ungrounded fuel container. 
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an 
ungrounded fuel container: 
² Place approved fuel container on the ground. 
² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle. 
² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while 
filling. 
² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill 
position. 
Fuel Filler Cap 
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off 
feature. 
When fueling your vehicle: 
1. Turn the engine off. 
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it 
stops. 
188
Maintenance and care 
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the 
filler pipe. 
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 
If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays 
on when you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly 
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap 
properly and reinstall it. 
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler 
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may 
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the 
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel system to work improperly in a collision, which may result in 
possible personal injury. 
Choosing the right fuel 
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law 
and could damage your vehicle. 
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED 
FUEL and ETHANOL (E85). The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law 
and could damage your vehicle. 
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system 
components. 
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic 
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was 
not designed may not be covered by your warranty. 
189
Octane recommendations 
Do not be concerned if your engine 
sometimes knocks lightly. However, 
if it knocks heavily under most 
87 driving conditions while you are 
using fuel with the recommended 
(R+M)/2 METHOD 
octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent 
any engine damage. 
Unleaded Gasoline engines 
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with an 
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolines 
labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in 
high altitude areas. 
FFV engine 
Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol (E85), “Regular” unleaded 
gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined. 
U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing 
pumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with the 
common abbreviation E85 or the appropriate percentage for that 
region. Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause 
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your 
warranty may be invalidated. 
Fuel quality 
Many of the world’s automakers issued the World-wide Fuel Charter that 
recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance 
and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that 
meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask 
your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel 
Charter. 
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel 
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane 
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your 
fuel may not be covered by your warranty. 
Unleaded Gasoline engines 
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability 
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded 
Maintenance and care 
190
Maintenance and care 
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly 
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become 
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician. 
FFV engine 
Your FFV will operate well on ordinary “Regular” unleaded gasoline, but 
only the highest quality fuel ethanol will provide the same level of 
protection and performance. 
Standards for fuel ethanol have been developed to provide FFVs the best 
possible performance, safety and durability. To assist alcohol fuel 
providers in meeting these standards, guidelines have also been 
developed which prescribe “Ethanol Fuel Compatible” dispensing station 
equipment. These standards and guidelines can be obtained from Ford 
Motor Company. Fuel stations may apply to be certified as meeting these 
standards. However, not all stations meet these standards at this time. To 
ensure proper operation of your FFV on fuel ethanol, refuel at certified 
stations. 
If you are experiencing a rough or rolling idle after start-up with the 
outside temperature above 27° C (80° F), the idle should improve within 
10 to 30 seconds. If the problems persist below this temperature, see 
your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
Cleaner air 
Ford approves the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to 
improve air quality. These gasolines may contain oxygenates up to 10% 
ethanol or 15% MTBE. 
Running out of fuel 
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse 
affect on powertrain components. 
If you have run out of fuel: 
² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after 
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to 
the engine. 
² Your “Check Engine” indicator may come on. For more information on 
the “Check Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrumentation chapter. 
191
Maintenance and care 
Fuel Filter 
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service 
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the 
appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. 
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The 
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system 
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. 
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY 
Measuring techniques 
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the 
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as 
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are 
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend 
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate 
measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). 
Filling the tank 
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to 
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill Capacities 
section of the Capacities and specifications chapter. 
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the 
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the 
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates 
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of usable fuel remaining in the 
fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. 
The amount of empty reserve varies and should not be relied 
upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after 
the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel 
the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to 
the empty reserve still present in the tank. 
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: 
² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time 
the tank is filled. 
² Allow three automatic click-offs when filling. 
² Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. 
192
² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. 
² Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the 
same direction each time you fill up. 
² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. 
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. 
Calculating fuel economy 
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 
(in kilometers or miles). 
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters 
or gallons). 
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record 
the current odometer reading. 
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer 
reading. 
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel 
economy: 
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers 
traveled. 
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. 
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city 
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel 
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records 
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel 
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. 
Ethanol has less energy per gallon than gasoline. Fuel economy will 
decrease as the percentage of ethanol used is increased. 
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits 
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change 
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. 
Habits 
² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. 
² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel 
economy. 
Maintenance and care 
193
Maintenance and care 
² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste 
fuel. 
² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. 
² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. 
² Slow down gradually. 
² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% 
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). 
² Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. 
² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. 
² You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if 
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. 
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel 
economy. 
² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may 
reduce fuel economy. 
² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel 
economy. 
² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. 
Maintenance 
² Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. 
² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel 
economy. 
² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant Specifications. 
² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the 
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks 
found in your vehicle Scheduled Maintenance Guide. 
Conditions 
² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy 
at any speed. 
² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). 
² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug 
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may 
reduce fuel economy. 
194
Maintenance and care 
² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. 
² Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. 
² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to 
driving on hilly terrain. 
² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top 
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. 
² Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than 
two-wheel-drive operation. 
² Close windows for high speed driving. 
EPA window sticker 
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your 
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA 
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons 
with other vehicles. 
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window 
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) 
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy 
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a 
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with 
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic 
converter and other emission control components continue to work 
properly: 
² Use only unleaded fuel (or E85, if equipped with the 3.0L FFV V6 
engine). 
² Avoid running out of fuel. 
² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at 
high speeds. 
² Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide performed 
according to the specified schedule. 
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance 
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its 
emissions system. 
195
Maintenance and care 
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for 
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting 
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine 
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light 
or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or 
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is 
not working properly. 
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially 
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. 
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By 
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, 
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not 
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent 
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on 
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the 
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up 
specifications. 
Please consult your “Warranty Guide” for complete emission warranty 
information. 
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing 
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of 
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine 
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning Lights and 
Chimes section of the Instrumentation chapter. Your vehicle may not 
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. 
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, 
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” 
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a 
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as 
described below: 
² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. 
196
Maintenance and care 
² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with 
at least four idle periods. 
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the 
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The 
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, 
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. 
BULBS 
Replacing exterior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: 
² Headlamps 
² Foglamps 
² High-mount brakelamp 
² Brakelamps 
² Turn signals 
² License plate lamp 
² Tail lamps 
² Back-up lamps 
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with 
new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, 
contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. 
Replacing headlamp bulbs 
To remove the headlamp bulb: 
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in 
OFF position. 
2. Open the hood. 
3. Locate the headlamp bulb 
through the hole in the upper 
radiator support assembly. 
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 
197
Maintenance and care 
5. Remove the bulb retaining ring by 
rotating it counterclockwise (when 
viewed from the rear) to free it 
from the bulb socket, and slide the 
ring off the plastic base. Keep the 
ring to retain the new bulb. 
6. Without turning, remove the old 
bulb by gently pulling it straight 
back out of the lamp assembly. 
To install the new bulb: 
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of 
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do 
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to 
break the next time the headlamps are operated. 
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the 
glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the 
bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in 
the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the 
lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp 
assembly. 
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the 
rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 
3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps, 
locking it into position. 
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the 
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should 
not need to align it again. 
198
Replacing front side marker bulbs 
1. Open the hood. 
2. Remove two screws from the 
lamp assembly. 
3. Disengage lamp assembly (it has 
a snap fit). 
4. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the bulb by pulling 
rearward. 
Maintenance and care 
5. Rotate bulb socket 
counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and 
remove from lamp assembly. 
6. Carefully pull bulb straight out of 
socket and push in the new bulb. 
7. Insert the bulb into the parking 
lamp assembly. When the grooves in 
the plastic base are aligned, push 
the bulb into the lamp assembly 
until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly and turn to 
lock. 
8. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until 
it “snaps.” 
9. Align the lamp studs with the plastic grommets on the vehicle and 
push to snap in place. 
10. Install two screws on lamp assembly. 
199
Maintenance and care 
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs 
The tail lamp/turn/backup lamp 
bulbs are located in the same 
portion of the tail lamp assembly, 
one just below the other. Follow the 
same steps to replace either bulb: 
1. Open the liftgate to expose the 
lamp assemblies. 
2. Remove the four screws and the 
lamp assembly from vehicle. 
3. Rotate bulb socket 
counterclockwise turn and remove 
from lamp assembly. 
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight 
out of the socket and push in the 
new bulb. 
5. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning clockwise. 
6. Install the lamp assembly and 
secure with four screws. 
Replacing foglamp bulbs 
1. Remove the bulb socket from the 
foglamp by turning 
counterclockwise. 
2. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the foglamp bulb. 
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new foglamp bulb. 
4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp turning clockwise. 
200
Maintenance and care 
Replacing high-mount brakelamp and cargo lamp bulbs 
The replacement of the high-mount brakelamp bulb and cargo lamp bulb 
is basically the same. This procedure covers the high-mount brakelamp 
bulb. 
To remove the brakelamp assembly: 
1. Remove the two screws and lamp 
assembly from vehicle. 
2. Remove the bulb socket from 
lamp assembly by rotating it 
counterclockwise. 
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of 
socket and push in the new bulb. 
To install the brakelamp assembly: 
1. Install the bulb socket into the 
lamp assembly by rotating 
clockwise. 
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. 
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 
The license plate bulbs are located 
behind the rear bumper. To change 
the license plate lamp bulbs: 
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to 
locate the bulb socket. 
2. Twist the socket counterclockwise 
and remove. 
3. Pull out the old bulb from socket 
and push in the new bulb. 
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning it clockwise. 
Using the right bulbs 
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must 
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for 
Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe 
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the 
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 
201
Maintenance and care 
Function Number of bulbs Trade number 
Park/turn/side marker 
lamps (front) 
4 3157 
2 194 
Headlamps 2 9007 
Foglamps (if 
2 
equipped) 
9006 HB4 
Hi-mount brakelamp 1 922 
Cargo lamps 2 906 
Rear stop/turn/tail 
2 
lamps 
3157 
Rear license plate 
lamps 
2 
194 
Backup lamp 2 3156 
Dome lamp 1 912 
Map/dome-SuperCab 
2 
904 
(if equipped) 
Map/dome-Regular 
Cab (if equipped) 
1 904 
1 904 
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. 
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer. 
REPLACING THE INTERIOR BULBS 
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: 
² interior overhead lamp 
² map lamp 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. 
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS 
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. 
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps 
should be checked by a qualified service technician. 
202
Maintenance and care 
CLEANING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
Refer to the Customer Assistance chapter for a list of Ford-approved 
cleaners, polishes and waxes. 
Washing your vehicle 
Wash your vehicle regularly with 
cold or lukewarm water. Never use 
strong detergents or soap. If your 
vehicle is particularly dirty, use a 
quality car wash detergent. Always 
use a clean sponge, washing glove 
or similar device and plenty of water 
for best results. To avoid spots, 
avoid washing when the hood is still 
warm, immediately after or during 
exposure to strong sunlight. 
During winter months, it is especially important to wash the vehicle on a 
regular basis. Large quantities of dirt and road salt are difficult to 
remove and also cause damage to the vehicle. 
Any gasoline spilled on the vehicle or deposits such as bird droppings 
should be washed and sponged off as soon as possible. Deposits not 
removed promptly can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork. 
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car 
wash. If you have wax applied to the vehicle at a commercial car wash, it 
is recommended that you clean the wiper blades and windshield as 
described in Cleaning the wiper blades and windshield. 
After washing, apply the brakes several times to dry them. 
Waxing your vehicle 
Waxing your vehicle on a regular basis will reduce minor scratches and 
paint damage. 
Wax when water stops beading on the surface. This could be every three 
or four months, depending on operating conditions. 
Use only carnauba or synthetic-based waxes. Use a cleaning fluid with a 
clean cloth to remove any bugs before waxing your vehicle. Use tar 
remover to remove any tar spots. 
Avoid getting wax on the windshield, or on any surfaces which appear 
coarse or bumpy. If you have wax applied at a commercial car wash, it is 
203
Maintenance and care 
recommended that you clean the wiper blades and windshield as 
described in Cleaning the wiper blades and windshield. 
Repairing paint chips 
Minor scratches or paint damage from road debris may be repaired with 
the Ultra Touch Prep and Finishing Kit (#F7AZ-19K507–BA), Lacquer 
Touch-up Paint (#ALBZ-19500–XXXXA), or Exterior Acrylic Spray 
Lacquer (#ALAZ-19500–XXXXA) from the Ford Car Care Chemicals line. 
Please note that the part numbers (shown as XXXX above) will vary with 
your vehicle’s specific coloring. Observe the application instructions on 
the products. 
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, tar 
spots, road salt and industrial fallout immediately. 
Cleaning the wheels 
Wash with the same detergent as the body of your vehicle. Do not use 
acid-based or alcohol-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuel or strong 
detergents. Never use abrasives that will damage the finish of special 
wheel surfaces. Use a tar remover to remove grease and tar. 
The brushes used in some automatic car washes may damage the finish 
on your wheels. Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are 
abrasive. 
Cleaning the engine 
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt 
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: 
² Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high 
pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. 
² Do not spray with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or 
other engine components. 
² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning 
the engine. 
204
² 4.0L 
² 3.0L 
Maintenance and care 
205
Maintenance and care 
² 2.5L 
² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the 
running engine may cause internal damage. 
Cleaning non-painted plastic exterior parts 
Use vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. Clean with a tar remover if 
necessary. Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or 
petroleum-based cleaners. 
Cleaning the exterior lamps 
Wash with the same detergent as the exterior of your vehicle. If 
necessary, use a tar remover such as Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road 
Oil Remover (B7A-19520–AA). 
To avoid scratching the lamps, do not use a dry paper towel, chemical 
solvents or abrasive cleaners. 
Cleaning the wiper blades, windshield and rear window 
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean the wiper blade rubber 
element with undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. 
To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or 
other solvents. 
If the wiper still does not wipe properly, this could be caused by 
substances on the windshield or rear window such as tree sap and some 
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes. Clean the outside of 
the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ford 
206
Maintenance and care 
Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, (E4AZ-19C507–AA), available from your 
Ford Dealer. Do not use abrasive cleansers on glass as they may cause 
scratches. The windshield or rear window is clean if beads do not form 
when you rinse it with water. The windshield, rear window and wiper 
blades should be cleaned on a regular basis, and blades or rubber 
elements replaced when worn. 
Cleaning the instrument panel 
Clean with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. 
Avoid cleaner or polish that increases the gloss of the upper portion of 
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver 
from undesirable windshield reflection. 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning 
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of 
the air bag system. 
Cleaning the instrument cluster lens 
Clean with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. 
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the lens. 
Cleaning the interior fabric 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. 
Remove fresh spots immediately. Do not use household or glass cleaners. 
These agents can stain and discolor the fabric. Use a mild soap and 
water solution if necessary. 
Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts 
Clean the safety belts with a mild soap solution recommended for 
cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belts, because 
these actions may weaken the belt webbing. 
Check the safety belt system periodically to make sure there are no 
nicks, wear or cuts. If your vehicle has been involved in an accident, 
refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in the Seating and safety 
restraints chapter. 
Underbody 
Flush the complete underside of vehicle frequently. Keep body drain 
holes unplugged. Inspect for road damage. 
207
Maintenance and care 
Inside windows 
Use Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA) for the inside 
windows if they become fogged. 
Cleaning mirrors 
Do not clean your mirrors with a dry cloth or abrasive materials. Use a 
soft cloth and mild detergent and water. Be careful when removing ice 
from outside mirrors because you may damage the reflective surface. 
208
Capacities and specifications 
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 
Component 2.5L I4 engine 3.0L FFV V6 
engine 
4.0L V6 engine 
Air filter 
element 
FA-1658 FA-1658 FA-1658 
Fuel filter FG-1002 FG-1002 FG-1002 
Battery BXT-59 BXT-59 BXT-59 
Oil filter FL-400S FL-400S FL-1A 
PCV valve EV-227 EV-130 EV-225 
Spark plugs* AWSF-32F** AGSF-22PP*** AGSF-22PP*** 
* Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark 
plug gap information. 
** Two spark plugs per cylinder required (eight total). 
*** If any spark plug needs to be removed for inspection, it must be 
re-installed in the same cylinder. Cylinders No.1, 2 and 3 have a “PG” 
suffix. Cylinders No. 4, 5 and 6 have a “P” suffix. If any spark plug needs 
to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the service part number suffix 
letters “PP” as shown on the engine decal. 
REFILL CAPACITIES 
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Engine oil 
(includes 
filter change) 
Motorcraft SAE 
5W-30 Super 
Premium Motor 
Oil 
2.5L I4 and 3.0L V6 
engine 
4.3L 
(4.5 quarts) 
4.0L V6 engine 4.7L 
(5.0 quarts) 
Brake fluid High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
All Fill to line on 
reservoir 
Power 
steering fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
All Fill to range on 
dipstick 
209
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Transmission 
fluid 1 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
5-speed manual 2.65L 
(2.8 quarts) 2 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtV 
ATF 
4x2 vehicles with 
automatic and 2.5L 
I4 engine 
9.4L 
(9.9 quarts) 3 
4x2 vehicles with 
automatic and 3.0L 
or 4.0L V6 engine 
9.5L 
(10.0 quarts)3 
4x4 vehicles with 
automatic 
9.8L 
(10.3 quarts) 3 
Engine 
coolant 4 
Premium Engine 
Coolant 
2.5L I4 engine with 
manual 
transmission 
10.0L 
(10.5 quarts) 
2.5L I4 engine with 
automatic 
transmission 
9.7L 
(10.2 quarts) 
3.0L V6 engine with 
manual 
transmission 
14.3L 
(15.1 quarts) 
3.0L V6 engine with 
automatic 
transmission 
14.0L 
(14.8 quarts) 
4.0L V6 engine with 
manual 
transmission 
13.0L 
(13.7 quarts) 
4.0L V6 engine with 
automatic 
transmission 
12.5L 
(13.2 quarts) 
Fuel tank N/A Regular cab (Short 
wheel base) 
62.4L 
(16.5 gallons) 
Regular cab (Long 
wheel base) 
75.7L 
(20.0 gallons) 
SuperCab 73.8L 
(19.5 gallons) 
Transfer 
Case Fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
4x4 Vehicles 1.2L 
(1.25 quarts) 
Capacities and specifications 
210
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Capacities and specifications 
Application Capacity 
Front axle 
lubricant 
Motorcraft SAE 
80W-90 
Premium Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
4x4 Vehicles 1.7L (3.6 pints) 
Rear axle 
lubricant5 
Motorcraft SAE 
80W-90 
Premium Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
All 2.4-2.5L 
(5.0-5.3 pints) 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-Clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
All 2.6L 
(2.75 quarts) 
1 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCONt and 
MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCONt and 
MERCONt V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine 
the correct service interval. 
2 Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the 
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. 
3 Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may 
vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The 
amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the 
indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 
4 Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant (green in color). DO NOT USE Ford 
Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine 
coolant, in the Maintenance and Care chapter. 
5 Traction-Lok axles use 2.2–2.4L (4.75–5.0 pints) of rear axle lubricant. 
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or 
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill 
of Traction-Lok axles. 
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to 
14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole. 
211
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS 
Item 
Ford part 
name or 
equivalent 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Front axle 
(4X4) 
Motorcraft SAE 
80W-90 
Premium Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A 
Rear axle 
Motorcraft SAE 
80W-90 
Premium Rear 
Axle Lubricant1 
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A 
Brake fluid and 
clutch fluid (if 
equipped) 
High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A 
and DOT 3 
Door weather 
strips 
Silicone 
Lubricant 
F7AZ-19G208-BA ESR-M13P4-A 
Engine coolant Ford Premium 
Engine Coolant 
E2FZ-19549-AA 
(in Canada, 
Motorcraft 
CXC-8-B) 
ESE-M97B44-A 
Engine oil 
Motorcraft SAE 
5W-30 Super 
Premium Motor 
Oil 
XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C153-G 
and API 
Certification 
Mark 
Hinges, door 
checks, latches, 
striker plates, 
fuel filler door 
hinge and seat 
tracks 
Multi-Purpose 
Grease 
DOAZ-19584-AA 
or 
F5AZ-19G209-AA 
ESB-M1C93-B or 
ESB-M1C159-A 
Capacities and specifications 
212
Item 
Capacities and specifications 
Ford part 
name or 
equivalent 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Transmission 
/steering/parking 
brake linkages 
and pivots, 
brake and clutch 
pedal shaft, 
clutch pilot 
bearing and. 
input shaft 
spline (manual 
transmission). 
Premium 
Long-Life Grease 
XG-1-C or 
XG-1-K 
ESA-M1C75-B 
Power steering 
fluid, transfer 
case fluid (4X4) 
and transmission 
fluid (manual) 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCONt 
Automatic 
transmission 
(4R44E, 5R44E 
and 5R55E) 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtV 
ATF 2 
XT-5-QM 
MERCONtV 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 
1 Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or 
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill 
of Traction-Lok axles. 
2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT 
mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance 
Guide to determine the correct service interval. 
213
Capacities and specifications 
ENGINE DATA 
Engine 2.5L I4 engine 
3.0L FFV V6 
engine 
4.0L V6 engine 
Cubic inches 153 182 245 
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane or 
Ethanol (E 85) 
87 octane 
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 
Spark plug gap 1.07-1.17 mm 
(0.042-.046 
inch) 
1.07-1.17 mm 
(0.042-.046 
inch) 
1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-0.056 
inch) 
Ignition system EDIS EDIS EDIS 
Compression 
9.4:1 9.14:1 9.0:1 
ratio 
Engine 
2.3L I4 
engine 
2.5L I4 
engine 
3.0L V6 
engine 
4.0L V6 
engine 
Cubic inches 138 153 182 245 
Required 
fuel 
87 octane 87 octane 87 octane 87 octane 
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 
Spark plug 
gap 
1.04-1.19mm 
(0.041-0.047 
inch) 
1.07-1.17mm 
(0.042-0.046 
inch) 
1.07-1.17mm 
(0.042-0.046 
inch) 
1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-0.056 
inch) 
Ignition 
system 
EDIS EDIS EDIS EDIS 
Compression 
ratio 
9.7:1 9.4:1 9.14:1 9.0:1 
214
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS 
Vehicle 
dimensions 
Regular Cab 
Short Wheel 
Base (SWB) mm 
(in) 
Regular Cab 
Long Wheel 
Base (LWB) 
mm (in) 
Supercab mm 
(in) 
(1) Overall 
length 
4 763 (187.5) 5 093 (200.5) 5 153 (202.9) 
(2) Overall 
width 
1 785 (70.3) 1 785 (70.3) 1 785 (70.3) 
(3) Overall 
height 4x2/4x4 
1 575 (62.0) / 
1 655 (65.2) 
1 586 (62.4) / 
1 655 (65.2) 
1 585 (62.4) / 
1 684 (66.3) 
(4) Wheelbase 2 831 (111.4) 2 983 (117.4) 3 192 (125.7) 
(5) Track - 
1 486 (58.5) 1 486 (58.5) 1 485 (58.5) 
Front 
(5) Track - 
Rear 
1 455 (57.3) 1 455 (57.3) 1 455 (57.3) 
5 
2 
3 
Capacities and specifications 
215
Capacities and specifications 
1 
4 
1 
4 
216
Capacities and specifications 
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE 
Certification label 
The National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration Regulations require 
that a Certification Label be affixed 
to a vehicle and prescribe where the 
Certification Label may be located. 
The Certification Label is located on 
the front door latch pillar on the 
driver’s side. 
Vehicle identification number 
The vehicle identification number is 
attached to a metal tag and is 
located on the driver side 
instrument panel. (Please note that 
in the graphic XXXX is 
representative of your vehicle 
identification number.) 
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A. 
DATE: XXXXX GVWR:XXXXX LB/ XXXXX KG 
FGAWR: XXXXXX/XXXXXXX RGAWR: XXXXXXX/XXXXXXX 
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL 
MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE 
DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
MAXIMUM LOAD=OCCUPANTS + LUGGAGE=XXXKG/XXXXLB 
OCCUPANTS: X TOTAL X FR X 2ND X RR OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE 
XX XXXKG/XXXXLB 
TIRE: XXXX/XXXXX XXX X XXXKG/XXXXLB 
PRESSURE (FR) XXX kPa/33 PSI COLD 
PRESSURE (RR) XXX kPa/33 PSI COLD 
TRAILER TOWING - SEE OWNER GUIDE 
EXT PNT: XXXXXX XXXXXX RC: XX DSO: XXXX F0000 
BAR INT TR TP/PS R AXLE TR SPR T0000 
X XX XXX X XX X XXXX 
UTC ÑFOHT-15294A10-GA 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
Engine number 
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification 
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and 
transfer case (if equipped). 
217
Customer assistance 
Ford Extended Service Plan 
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by 
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP 
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company 
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in 
Canada). It provides the following: 
² benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you 
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain 
maintenance and wear items) 
² protection against repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty 
expires 
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln/ 
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in 
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored 
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement 
benefits for towing and rental coverage. (In Hawaii, rules vary. See your 
dealer for details.) 
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection 
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of 
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln/Mercury and Ford of 
Canada dealers. 
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the 
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact 
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to 
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended 
Service Plan coverage options. 
Getting the service you need 
At home 
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to 
service your vehicle. When you need warranty repairs your selling dealer 
would like you to return to it for that service, but you may also take your 
vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership 
authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special 
training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty 
repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the 
vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership 
can not assist you, then contact the Customer Assistance Center. 
218
Customer assistance 
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you 
are receiving, follow these steps: 
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your 
selling/servicing dealership. 
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales 
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, 
please contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center. 
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada dealerships also carry quality 
parts and accessories, providing you with equipment reliability. 
Away from home 
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when 
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership 
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the 
Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership to 
help you. In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Assistance Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
In Canada: 
Customer Assistance Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
219
Customer assistance 
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle 
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could 
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford 
Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Assistance Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-521-4140 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
In Canada: 
Customer Assistance Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please 
have the following information available when contacting a Customer 
Assistance Center: 
² Your telephone number (home and business) 
² The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located 
² The year and make of your vehicle 
² The date of vehicle purchase 
² The current odometer reading 
² The vehicle identification number (VIN) 
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish 
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.) or the 
Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada). 
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing 
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also 
allowed a final repair attempt in some states. 
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the 
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss 
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing 
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This 
220
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state 
created rights or other rights which are independent of the 
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. only) 
The Dispute Settlement Board is: 
² an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes 
² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company 
vehicles 
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford 
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify 
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without 
incurring obligations per applicable state law. 
What kinds of cases does the Board review? 
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance as designed 
concerns on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln 
Mercury light trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written 
new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: 
² a non-Ford product 
² a non-Ford dealership 
² sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated 
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as 
designed 
² a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a 
service or product concern is being reviewed 
² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including 
maintenance and wear items) 
² alleged personal injury/property damage claims 
² cases currently in litigation 
² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes 
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to 
review commercial vehicles) 
² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties 
Customer assistance 
221
Customer assistance 
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility 
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. 
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique 
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin 
purchasers/lessees. 
Board membership 
The Board consists of: 
² three consumer representatives 
² a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative 
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by 
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen 
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for 
their business leadership qualities. 
What the Board needs 
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the 
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application 
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return 
receipt requested. 
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you 
will receive an acknowledgment indicating: 
² the file number assigned to your application 
² the toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator 
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be 
asked to submit statements. 
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: 
² legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders 
relevant to the case 
² the year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed 
on your vehicle ownership license 
² the date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s) 
² the current mileage 
² the name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle 
² a brief description of your unresolved concern 
222
Customer assistance 
² a brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor 
Company 
² the names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the 
dealership(s) 
² a description of the action you expect to resolve your concern 
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not 
qualify for Board review. 
Oral presentations 
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 
#6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation 
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the 
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. Oral presentation may 
be requested by the Board as well. 
Making a decision 
Board members review all available information related to each 
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial 
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. 
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that 
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board 
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to 
consider some cases. 
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a 
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of 
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but 
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to 
them under state or federal law. 
To Request a DSB Brochure/Application 
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the 
Board at the following address/phone number: 
Dispute Settlement Board 
P.O. Box 5120 
Southfield, MI 48086–5120 
1–800–428–3718 
223
Customer assistance 
You may also contact the North American Customer Assistance Center at 
1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or 
by writing to the Center at the following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Assistance Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM 
(CANADA ONLY) 
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and 
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been 
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party 
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor 
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy 
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a 
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is 
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal 
proceedings. 
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct 
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal 
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the 
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve 
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s 
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. 
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces, except 
Quebec. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your 
CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. 
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA 
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the 
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you 
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. 
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock 
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or 
owner relations/customer assistance office. 
224
Customer assistance 
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may 
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause 
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of 
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper 
fuel. 
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty 
importing your vehicle back into the U.S. 
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in 
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: 
FORD MOTOR COMPANY 
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 
1555 Fairlane Drive 
Fairlane Business Park #3 
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 
U.S.A. 
Telephone: (313) 594-4857 
FAX: (313) 390-0804 
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford 
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct 
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. 
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of 
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and 
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market 
Operations. 
FORD CAR CARE PRODUCTS FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
Ford has many quality products available from your dealer to clean your 
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been 
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom 
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each 
product is made from high quality materials and that meet or exceed 
Ford’s rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or products 
of equivalent quality: 
Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* 
Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish 
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 
225
Customer assistance 
Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in 
Canada) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Metal Surface Cleaner 
Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner* 
Motorcraft Car Wash Concentrate 
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner 
Ford Spot and Stain Remover* 
Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing 
Ford Triple Clean 
Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name 
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
A wide selection of Ford accessories are available for your vehicle 
through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln Mercury or Ford of Canada 
dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to 
fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement 
the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each 
accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds 
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. Ford accessories are 
warranted for up to 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) on all cars 
and light trucks and 12 months with unlimited distance on medium/heavy 
duty trucks unless the accessory is installed on a new vehicle, then the 
warranty becomes the balance of the new vehicle’s warranty or the 
accessories warranty, whichever is greater. See your dealer for complete 
warranty information and availability. 
Not all accessories are available for all models. 
226
Customer assistance 
Vehicle Security 
Styled wheel protector locks 
Vehicle security systems 
Comfort and convenience 
Cargo nets 
Cargo organizers 
Cargo shades (Super Cab only) 
Engine block heaters 
Manual sliding rear window 
Tire step 
Travel equipment 
Daytime running lights 
Fog lights 
Heavy-duty battery 
Pickup box rails 
Removable luggage rack 
Running boards 
Speed control 
Trailer hitch 
Trailer hitch bars and balls 
Trailer hitch wiring adaptor 
Protection and appearance equipment 
Air bag anti-theft locks 
Bed mat/bedliner tailgate covers 
Bed mats 
Bedliners 
Carpet floor mats 
Cleaners, waxes and polishes 
Front end covers (full and sport) 
227
Customer assistance 
Hood deflectors 
Locking gas cap 
Lubricants and oils 
Molded vinyl floor mats 
Side window air deflectors 
Spare tire lock 
Step bumpers 
Step/sill plates 
Tailgate protector 
Tonneau covers 
Touch-up paint 
Universal floor mats 
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in 
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: 
² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your 
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of 
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety 
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight 
information. 
² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio 
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile 
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and 
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such 
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC 
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service 
technician. 
² Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your 
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive 
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may 
cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may be 
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your 
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and 
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily 
affect your vehicle’s operation.) 
² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage 
that may result from the use of such equipment. 
228
Customer assistance 
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE 
To order the publications in this portfolio: 
Make checks payable to: 
HELM, INCORPORATED 
P.O. Box 07150 
Detroit, Michigan 48207 
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST, 
for credit card holders only 
Obtaining a French owner’s guide 
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 
229
Reporting safety defects 
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) 
If you believe that your vehicle has 
a defect that could cause a crash, or 
could cause injury or death, you 
should immediately inform the 
National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) in addition 
to notifying Ford Motor Company. 
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and 
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a 
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved 
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Ford Motor Company. 
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free 
at 1–800–424–9393 (202–366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write 
to: 
NHTSA 
U.S. Department of Transportation 
400 Seventh Street 
Washington D.C. 20590 
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from 
the Hotline. 
230
Air bag supplemental 
restraint system ..........................84 
and child safety seats ..............85 
description ................................84 
disposal ......................................88 
driver air bag ............................86 
indicator light ......................10,87 
operation ...................................86 
passenger air bag .....................86 
passenger 
deactivation switch ..............25,88 
Air cleaner filter .......................209 
Air conditioning ..........................19 
manual heating and air 
conditioning system .................21 
Ambulance packages ....................3 
Antifreeze 
(see Engine coolant) ................168 
Anti-lock brake system 
(see Brakes) .......................107,108 
Anti-theft system 
warning light .............................11 
Audio system (see Radio) .........26 
Automatic transmission ............111 
driving an automatic 
overdrive ..........................112,114 
fluid, adding ............................173 
fluid, checking ........................173 
fluid, refill capacities ..............209 
fluid, specification ..................214 
Auxiliary power point .................25 
Axle 
lubricant specifications ...212,214 
refill capacities ........................209 
traction lok ..............................124 
Battery .......................................178 
acid, treating emergencies .....178 
charging system 
warning light .............................11 
jumping a disabled battery ....152 
maintenance-free ....................178 
replacement, specifications ...209 
Index 
servicing ..................................178 
voltage gauge ............................17 
Belt minder .................................80 
Brakes ........................................106 
anti-lock .....................106,107,108 
anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
warning light ......................10,108 
brake warning light ..................10 
fluid, checking and adding ....166 
fluid, refill capacities ..............209 
fluid, specifications ..........212,214 
lubricant specifications ...212,214 
parking ....................................108 
shift interlock ..........................111 
Break-in period .............................2 
Capacities for refilling fluids ....209 
Cargo area shade ........................63 
Cargo net .....................................63 
Certification Label ....................217 
Child safety restraints ................93 
child safety belts ......................93 
Child safety seats ........................94 
attaching with tether straps ....99 
in front seat ..............................96 
in rear seat ................................96 
tether anchorage hardware .....99 
Cleaning your vehicle ...............203 
engine compartment ..............204 
exterior .............................204,207 
exterior lamps .........................206 
instrument panel ....................207 
instrument panel lens ............207 
interior .....................................207 
mirrors .....................................208 
plastic parts ............................206 
safety belts ..............................207 
washing ....................................203 
waxing .....................................203 
wheels ......................................204 
windows ..................................208 
wiper blades ............................206 
231
Climate control (see Air 
conditioning or Heating) ............19 
Clock .............................29,36,42,51 
Clutch 
fluid ..........................................167 
operation while driving ..........116 
recommended shift speeds ....118 
Console ........................................63 
Coolant 
checking and adding ..............168 
refill capacities .................172,209 
specifications ...................212,214 
Cruise control 
(see Speed control) ....................55 
Customer Assistance ................137 
Ford accessories 
for your vehicle ......................225 
Ford Extended 
Service Plan ............................218 
Getting assistance outside the 
U.S. and Canada .....................224 
Getting roadside assistance ...137 
Getting the 
service you need ....................218 
Ordering additional 
owner’s literature ...................229 
The Dispute 
Settlement Board ...................221 
Utilizing the Mediation/ 
Arbitration Program ...............224 
Daytime running lamps 
(see Lamps) ................................18 
Dipstick 
automatic 
transmission fluid ...................173 
engine oil .................................163 
Doors 
door ajar warning .....................12 
lubricant specifications ..........212 
Driveline universal 
joint and slip yoke ....................177 
Driving under 
special conditions ..............122,123 
mud ..........................................122 
sand .........................................122 
snow and ice ...........................123 
through water ..................122,124 
Emergencies, roadside 
jump-starting ..........................152 
Emission control system ..........195 
Engine .................................214,215 
check engine/ 
service engine soon light ...........8 
cleaning ...................................204 
coolant .....................................168 
idle speed control ...................178 
lubrication 
specifications ...................212,214 
refill capacities ........................209 
service points ............160,161,162 
starting after a collision .........138 
Engine block heater .................104 
Engine oil ..................................163 
checking and adding ..............163 
dipstick ....................................163 
filter, specifications .........165,209 
recommendations ...................165 
refill capacities ........................209 
specifications ...................212,214 
Exhaust fumes ..........................105 
Fluid capacities .........................209 
Foglamps .....................................18 
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles ..12,119 
control trac ...............................24 
description ..............................119 
driving off road .......................121 
electronic shift ...................24,119 
indicator light .........................119 
preparing to drive your 
vehicle .....................................110 
Fuel ............................................186 
calculating fuel economy .......192 
cap ...........................................188 
Index 
232
capacity ...................................209 
choosing the right fuel ...........189 
comparisons with EPA fuel 
economy estimates .................195 
detergent in fuel .....................191 
filling your vehicle 
with fuel ....................186,188,192 
filter, specifications .........192,209 
fuel pump shut-off switch .....138 
gauge .........................................14 
improving fuel economy ........192 
octane rating .............190,214,215 
quality ......................................190 
running out of fuel .................191 
safety information relating to 
automotive fuels .....................186 
Fuses ...................................140,141 
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............188 
Gas mileage 
(see Fuel economy) .................192 
Gauges .........................................14 
battery voltage gauge ...............17 
engine coolant 
temperature gauge ...................15 
engine oil pressure gauge ........17 
fuel gauge ..................................14 
odometer ...................................16 
speedometer .............................16 
tachometer ................................15 
trip odometer ............................16 
GAWR 
(Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....125 
calculating ...............................127 
definition .................................125 
driving with a heavy load ......125 
location ....................................125 
GVWR (Gross 
Vehicle Weight Rating) .............125 
calculating ........................125,127 
definition .................................125 
driving with a heavy load ......125 
location ....................................125 
Index 
Hazard flashers .........................138 
Headlamps ...................................18 
aiming ......................................202 
bulb specifications ..................201 
daytime running lights .............18 
flash to pass ..............................19 
high beam ............................11,18 
replacing bulbs .......................197 
turning on and off ....................18 
warning chime ..........................13 
Heating ........................................19 
heater only system ...................19 
Hood ..........................................159 
Ignition ................................214,215 
positions of the ignition ...........54 
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..94 
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) 
testing ........................................196 
Instrument panel 
cleaning ...................................207 
cluster ...................................8,207 
lighting up 
panel and interior .....................19 
location of components ..............8 
Jump-starting your vehicle ......152 
Keys 
key in ignition chime ...............13 
positions of the ignition ...........54 
Lamps 
bulb replacement 
specifications chart ................201 
cargo lamps ...............................19 
daytime running light ...............18 
fog lamps ...................................18 
headlamps .................................18 
headlamps, flash to pass ..........19 
instrument panel, dimming .....19 
interior lamps .........................202 
replacing bulbs ..197,199,200,201 
Lane change indicator 
(see Turn signal) ........................54 
Lights, warning and indicator ......8 
233
air bag ........................................10 
anti-lock brakes (ABS) .....10,108 
anti-theft ...................................11 
brake ..........................................10 
charging system ........................11 
check coolant ............................12 
check engine ...............................8 
cruise indicator .........................12 
door ajar ....................................12 
fuel reset ...................................10 
high beam .................................11 
overdrive off ..............................11 
safety belt .................................10 
speed control ............................59 
turn signal indicator .................11 
Load limits .................................125 
GAWR ......................................125 
GVWR ......................................125 
trailer towing ..........................125 
Loading instructions .................126 
Lubricant specifications ....212,214 
Lumbar support, seats ...............71 
Manual transmission .................116 
fluid capacities ........................209 
lubricant specifications ..........214 
reverse .....................................118 
Mirrors 
cleaning ...................................208 
side view mirrors (power) .......62 
Motorcraft parts .................192,209 
Octane rating ............................190 
Odometer .....................................16 
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................163 
Overdrive .....................................59 
Panic alarm feature, remote 
entry system ................................64 
Parking brake ............................108 
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....209 
Power distribution box 
(see Fuses) ...............................144 
Power door locks ........................62 
Power steering ..........................109 
fluid, checking and adding ....173 
fluid, refill capacity ................209 
fluid, specifications ..........212,214 
Preparing to 
drive your vehicle .....................110 
Radio ............................................26 
Relays ........................................140 
Remote entry system ............63,64 
illuminated entry ......................67 
locking/unlocking doors ...........64 
panic alarm ...............................64 
replacement/additional 
transmitters ...............................66 
replacing the batteries .............65 
Safety belts (see Safety 
restraints) ...........13,72,73,74,75,76 
Safety defects, reporting ..........230 
Safety restraints ......72,73,74,75,76 
belt minder ...............................80 
cleaning the safety belts ...83,207 
extension assembly ..................79 
for adults ....................73,74,75,76 
for children ...............................93 
lap belt ......................................78 
warning light 
and chime ........................10,13,79 
Safety seats for children ............94 
Seat belts 
(see Safety restraints) ...............72 
Seats ............................................70 
child safety seats ......................94 
SecuriLock passive 
anti-theft system ...............67,68,69 
Servicing your vehicle ..............158 
Snowplowing .................................3 
Spark plugs, 
specifications ...............209,214,215 
Special notice ................................3 
ambulance conversions ..............3 
utility-type vehicles ....................3 
Specification chart, 
lubricants ............................212,214 
Index 
234
Speed control ..............................55 
Speedometer ...............................16 
Starting your vehicle .........100,102 
jump starting ..........................152 
Steering wheel 
tilting .........................................60 
Tachometer .................................15 
Tires ......................147,181,182,183 
changing ...........................147,150 
checking the pressure ............183 
replacing ..................................184 
rotating ....................................183 
snow tires and chains ............185 
tire grades ...............................182 
treadwear ................................182 
Towing .......................................183 
recreational towing .................136 
wrecker ....................................157 
Traction-lok rear axle ...............124 
Transfer case 
fluid checking .........................177 
Transmission 
automatic operation ...............111 
fluid, checking and adding 
(automatic) .............................173 
fluid, checking and adding 
(manual) .................................176 
Index 
fluid, refill capacities ..............209 
lubricant specifications ...212,214 
manual operation ....................116 
Trip odometer .............................16 
Turn signal .............................11,54 
Vehicle dimensions ...................215 
Vehicle Identification Number 
(VIN) ..........................................217 
Vehicle loading ..........................125 
camper bodies ........................136 
Ventilating your vehicle ...........105 
Warning chimes ...........................13 
Warning lights (see Lights) .........8 
Washer fluid ..............................168 
Water, Driving through .............124 
Windows 
power .........................................61 
Windshield washer fluid 
and wipers 
checking and adding fluid .....168 
checking and cleaning ............180 
operation ...................................61 
replacing wiper blades ...........181 
Wrecker towing .........................157 
235
236
237
238
Filling station information 
Item Information 
Required fuel Refer to 9Octane 
recommendations9 in the 
Maintenance and care chapter. 
Fuel tank capacity (Regular 
cab-Short wheel base) 
62.4L (16.5 gallons) 
Fuel tank capacity (Regular 
cab-Long wheel base) 
75.7 (20.0 gallons) 
Fuel tank capacity (SuperCab) 73.8L (19.5 gallons) 
Engine oil capacity (includes filter 
change)-2.5L I4 and 3.0L V6 
engines 
4.3L (4.5 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor 
Oil, Ford specification 
WSS-M2C153-G. 
Engine oil capacity (includes filter 
change)-4.0L V6 engine 
4.7L (5.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor 
Oil, Ford specification 
WSS-M2C153-G. 
Tire size and pressure Refer to the Certification Label on 
inside of driver’s door. 
Hood release Pull handle under the left side of 
the instrument panel. 
Coolant capacity-2.5L I4 with 
manual transmission 1 
10.0L (10.5 quarts) 
Coolant capacity-2.5L I4 with 
automatic transmission 1 
9.7L (10.2 quarts) 
Coolant capacity-3.0L V6 with 
manual transmission 1 
14.3L (15.1 quarts) 
Coolant capacity-3.0L V6 with 
automatic transmission 1 
14.0L (14.8 quarts) 
Coolant capacity-4.0L V6 with 
manual transmission 1 
13.0L (13.7 quarts) 
Coolant capacity-4.0L V6 with 
automatic transmission 1 
12.5L (13.2 quarts) 
Power steering fluid capacity Fill to range on dipstick. Use 
Motorcraft MERCONt ATF. 
239
Filling station information 
Item Information 
Manual transmission fluid capacity 2.65L (2.8 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF. 2 
Automatic transmission fluid 
capacity-4x2 vehicles with I4 
engine 
9.4L (9.9 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 
Automatic transmission fluid 
capacity-4x2 vehicles with V6 
engine 
9.5L (10.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 
Automatic transmission fluid 
capacity-4x4 vehicles 
9.8L (10.3 quarts). Use Motorcraft 
MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 
Windshield washer fluid 2.6L (2.75 quarts). Use Ultra-Clear 
Windshield Washer Concentrate. 
1 Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant (green in color). DO NOT USE Ford 
Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine 
coolant, in the Maintenance and Care chapter. 
2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT 
mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance 
Guide to determine the correct service interval. 
3 Approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Fluid level should 
be checked by a qualified service technician. 
240

More Related Content

PDF
01 mountaneer
PDF
01 explorer
PDF
01 navigator
PDF
00 navigator
PDF
00 explorer
PDF
00 mountaneer
PDF
98 navigator
PDF
98 f series 150
01 mountaneer
01 explorer
01 navigator
00 navigator
00 explorer
00 mountaneer
98 navigator
98 f series 150

What's hot (20)

PDF
01 excursion
PDF
01 ls
PDF
00 ls
PDF
00 escort
PDF
00 continental
PDF
98 explorer
PDF
98 expedition
PDF
01 town car
PDF
98 e150 250-350-450
PDF
98 mountaineer
PDF
01 explorer sport trac
PDF
00 crown victoria
PDF
00 sable
PDF
98 ranger
PDF
00 town car
PDF
00 grand marquis
PDF
01 ranger
PDF
01 villager
PDF
02 escort
PDF
00 expedition
01 excursion
01 ls
00 ls
00 escort
00 continental
98 explorer
98 expedition
01 town car
98 e150 250-350-450
98 mountaineer
01 explorer sport trac
00 crown victoria
00 sable
98 ranger
00 town car
00 grand marquis
01 ranger
01 villager
02 escort
00 expedition
Ad

Viewers also liked (14)

PDF
Es(развлекательная система пассажиров)12 2006
PDF
00 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
PDF
13e150 450
PDF
Ranger06 2010 light
PDF
Fusion(cg3441)ru01 2009
PDF
13escape2
PDF
Transit05 2010 light
PDF
Fiesta(cg3545ru)03 2010 light
PDF
97 f 53motorhome
PDF
руководство к легковым и грузовым автомобилям форда.1930г
PDF
98 grand marquis
PDF
98 countur
PDF
97crown
PDF
00 motorhome
Es(развлекательная система пассажиров)12 2006
00 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
13e150 450
Ranger06 2010 light
Fusion(cg3441)ru01 2009
13escape2
Transit05 2010 light
Fiesta(cg3545ru)03 2010 light
97 f 53motorhome
руководство к легковым и грузовым автомобилям форда.1930г
98 grand marquis
98 countur
97crown
00 motorhome
Ad

Similar to 00 ranger (13)

PDF
00 mustang
PDF
98 f series 250 lihgt duty
PDF
01 escort
PDF
01 expedition
PDF
01 continental
PDF
98 mustang
PDF
01 escape
PDF
00 excursion
PDF
00 f series 150
PDF
00 villager
PDF
01 postal explorer
PDF
00 postal explorer
PDF
00 econoline e150 250-350-450
00 mustang
98 f series 250 lihgt duty
01 escort
01 expedition
01 continental
98 mustang
01 escape
00 excursion
00 f series 150
00 villager
01 postal explorer
00 postal explorer
00 econoline e150 250-350-450

00 ranger

  • 1. Contents Before driving Introduction 2 Instrumentation 6 Controls and features 18 Seating and safety restraints 70 Starting and driving Starting 100 Driving 106 Roadside emergencies 137 Servicing Maintenance and care 158 Capacities and specifications 209 Customer assistance 218 Reporting safety defects 230 Index 231 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 1999 Ford Motor Company 1
  • 2. Introduction The following warning may be required by California law: CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning Engine exhaust, some if its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, or birth defects or other reproductive harm. ICONS Indicates a safety alert. Read the following section on Warnings. Indicates vehicle information related to recycling and other environmental concerns will follow. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards protecting the environment. Indicates a message regarding child safety restraints. Refer to Seating and safety restraints for more information. Indicates that this Owner Guide contains information on this subject. Please refer to the Index to locate the appropriate section which will provide you more information. WARNINGS Warnings provide information which may reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 2
  • 3. Introduction INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE The information found in this guide was in effect at the time of printing. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. SPECIAL NOTICES Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter as well as the “Four Wheeling” supplement included with 4WD and utility type vehicles. Using your vehicle as a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Electric vehicles For information on operating your Electric Vehicle, also refer to the Electric Vehicle Owner’s Guide Supplement. 3
  • 4. These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front Air Bag-Side Child Seat Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Tether Anchorage Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid - Non-Petroleum Based Traction Control Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Defrost/Demist Rear Window Defrost/Demist Power Windows Front/Rear Power Window Lockout Introduction 4
  • 5. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Child Safety Door Lock/Unlock Interior Luggage Compartment Release Symbol Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Level MAX MIN Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Jack Introduction 5
  • 6. Instrumentation DIM OFF 50 40 CHECK ENGINE F H H H SET ACC E L 20 100 60 80 100 120 BRAKE THEFT OFF COAST ON ABS SPEED CONT O/D OFF P R N D 2 1 L L 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 DOOR AJAR <FUEL DOOR ! Headlamp control (pg. 18) Instrument cluster (pg. 8) Instrument panel dimmer switch (pg. 19) Speed control* (pg. 55) Driver air bag (pg. 84) Turn signal and wiper/washer control (pg. 61) Parking brake release (pg. 108) 6
  • 7. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4wd control* (pg. 119) 4X4 LOW ST DX FM 1 2 3 4 AM/FM OFF ON OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG TONE TONE VOL SEEK 12 CLK TUNE VOL PUSH ON Instrumentation Climate control system (pg. 19) Auxiliary power point (pg. 25) Electronic sound system (pg. 26) Passenger air bag deactivate switch (pg. 88) Fog lamp control * (pg. 18) Hood release (pg. 159) * if equipped 7
  • 8. WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Standard instrument cluster DOOR AJAR 50 60 70 80 0 0 0 CHECK 40 ENGINE F H H H 30 20 60 80 100 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 180 10 MPH 100 140 160 km/h E L P R N D 2 1 <FUEL DOOR ABS ! BRAKE Optional instrument cluster L L 90 110 120 SPEED CONT O/D THEFT OFF C 50 60 70 40 80 90 0 0 0 80 100 120 DOOR CHECK AJAR GAGE H H 2 1 0 3 4 5 6 RPMx1000 ABS ! BRAKE CHECK ENGINE FUEL RESET E F H 30 20 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 180 10 MPH 100 140 160 km/h 110 120 P R N D 2 1 THEFT SPEED CONT 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW L O/D OFF L Check engine Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s CHECK emission control system. This system is commonly known as the ENGINE On Board Diagnostics System (OBD II). This OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. Instrumentation 8
  • 9. Instrumentation The Check Engine indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the engine is started, one of the engine’s emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require towing. What you should do if the check engine light illuminates Light turns on solid: This means that the OBD II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check Engine light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the Check Engine light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. If the Check Engine light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Light is blinking: Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. 9
  • 10. Fuel reset (if equipped) Illuminates when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and the FUEL fuel pump shut-off switch has been triggered. For more information, RESET refer to Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. Air bag readiness Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned ON. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately. Safety belt Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position to remind you to fasten your safety belts. For more information, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Brake system warning Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON ! position. Also illuminates if the BRAKE parking brake is engaged. If the brake warning lamp does not illuminate at these times, seek service immediately. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON ABS position. If the light remains on, continues to flash or fails to illuminate, have the system serviced immediately. With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated with the parking brake released. Instrumentation 10
  • 11. Instrumentation Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on. If one or both of the indicators stay on continuously or flash faster, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb. Refer to Exterior bulbs in the Maintenance and care chapter. High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. Anti-theft system (if equipped) Refer to SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system in the Controls and features chapter. THEFT Charging system Illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position and the engine is off. The light also illuminates when the battery is not charging properly, requiring electrical system service. O/D off (if equipped) Illuminates when the Transmission O/D Control Switch (TCS), refer to Overdrive control in the Controls OFF and Features chapter, has been pushed turning the transmission overdrive function OFF. When the light is on, the transmission does not operate in the overdrive mode, refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. The light may also flash steadily if a transmission malfunction is detected. If the light does not come on when the Transmission Control Switch is depressed or if the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. 11
  • 12. Check gage (if equipped) Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high, the engine oil pressure is low or the fuel gauge is at or near empty. The ignition must be in the ON position for this lamp to illuminate. The lamp will also illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position. Refer to Engine coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information. Four wheel drive low (if equipped) Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the START position. Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. If the light continues to flash have the system serviced. Four wheel drive high (if equipped) Momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the START position. Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. If the light continues to flash have the system serviced. Door ajar Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON or START position and any door is open. CHECK GAGE 4WD LOW 4WD HIGH DOOR AJAR Speed control This light comes on when either the SET/ACCEL or RESUME controls SPEED are pressed. It turns off when the CONT speed control OFF control is pressed, the brake is applied or the ignition is turned to the OFF position. Instrumentation 12
  • 13. Instrumentation Safety belt warning chime Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. For information on the safety belt warning chime, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime For information on the SRS warning chime, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Key-in-ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACC position and the driver’s door is opened. Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (and the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened. 13
  • 14. GAUGES Standard instrument cluster gauges DOOR AJAR 50 40 CHECK ENGINE F H H H E L ABS 20 60 80 100 Optional instrument cluster gauges 2 1 20 Fuel gauge Displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank (when the key is in the ON position). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion. The ignition should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is being refueled. When the gauge first indicates empty, there is a small amount of reserve fuel in the tank. When refueling the SPEED THEFT CONT O/D OFF 120 P R N D 2 1 L L 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 100 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 <FUEL DOOR ! BRAKE C 0 3 4 5 6 RPMx1000 ABS CHECK ENGINE FUEL RESET E F 50 40 80 100 120 H H H 100 60 P R N D 2 1 THEFT SPEED CONT 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW O/D OFF L L 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 DOOR AJAR CHECK GAGE ! BRAKE E F Instrumentation 14
  • 15. Instrumentation vehicle from empty indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will be less than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains within the normal area (the area between the “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is H overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off C the engine immediately and let the engine cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and care chapter. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication will not be accurate. Tachometer (if equipped) Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. 2 1 0 3 4 5 6 RPMx1000 15
  • 16. Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed. Odometer Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. Trip odometer Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys. To reset, depress the control. 20 50 40 60 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 100 120 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 80 100 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 20 50 40 60 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 100 120 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 80 100 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 20 50 40 60 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 100 120 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 80 100 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 Instrumentation 16
  • 17. Engine oil pressure gauge This shows the engine oil pressure in the system. Sufficient pressure exists as long as the needle remains in the normal range (the area between the “L” and “H”). H If the gauge indicates low pressure, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine L immediately. Check the oil level. Add oil if needed (refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and care chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. Battery voltage gauge This shows the battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON position. If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range (as indicated), have the vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as possible. L H Instrumentation 17
  • 18. HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control to the first position to turn on the parking lamps. Rotate to the second position to also turn on the headlamps. Foglamp control (if equipped) Turn on the low-beam headlamps and press the foglamp control to activate the foglamps. The foglamp control will illuminate when the foglamps are on. Press the foglamp control a second time to deactivate the foglamps. Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: ² the ignition must be in the ON position and ² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. High beams Push forward to activate. Pull toward you to deactivate. OFF Controls and features 18
  • 19. Flash to pass Pull toward you to activate and release to deactivate. PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel during headlamp and parklamp operation. ² Rotate up to brighten. ² Rotate down to dim. ² Rotate to full up position (past detent) to turn on interior lamps. CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM Heater only system (if equipped) Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Controls and features DIM OFF 19
  • 20. Temperature control knob Controls the temperature of the airflow inside the vehicle. On heater-only systems, the air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature. Mode selector control Controls the direction of the airflow to the inside of the vehicle. ² (Panel)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. ² (Panel and floor)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. ² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. ² (Floor)-Allows for maximum heating. Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. ² (Floor and defrost)-Distributes outside air through the floor ducts and the windshield defroster ducts. ² (Defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. Operating tips ² In humid weather, select before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. After a few minutes, select any desired position. ² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF position. ² Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). OFF Controls and features 20
  • 21. ² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area (at the bottom of the windshield under the hood). Controls and features ² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. Also, avoid placing small objects on top of your instrument panel. These objects can fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow and possibly damage your climate control system. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. Manual heating and air conditioning system (if equipped) Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Temperature control knob Controls the temperature of the airflow inside the vehicle. OFF A/C MAX A/C 21
  • 22. Controls and features Mode selector control Controls the direction of the airflow to the inside of the vehicle. OFF A/C MAX A/C The air conditioning compressor will operate in all modes except and . However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher. Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you have stopped the vehicle. Under normal conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. In snowy or dirty conditions, leave the mode selector in the OFF position. ² MAX A/C-Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is noisier than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. This mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. ² A/C-Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter than MAX A/C but not as economical. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. ² (Panel)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. ² OFF-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. ² (Panel and floor)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. 22
  • 23. Controls and features ² (Floor)-Allows for maximum heating by distributing outside air through the floor ducts. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. ² (Floor and defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defrost ducts. If the temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. ² (Defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the temperature is about 10°C (50°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. Operating tips ² In humid weather, select before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. After a few minutes, select any desired position. ² To prevent humidity buildup inside the vehicle, do not drive with the climate control system in the OFF or MAX A/C position. ² Do not put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). ² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area (at the bottom of the windshield under the hood). ² If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during hot weather, the air conditioner will do a much faster job of cooling if you drive for two or three minutes with the windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle. Then operate your air conditioner as you would normally. 23
  • 24. ² Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. Also, avoid placing small objects on top of your instrument panel. These objects can fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow and possibly damage your climate control system. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 4WD CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) This control operates the 4WD. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW Controls and features 24
  • 25. AUXILIARY POWER POINT Controls and features SEEK 12V TUNE 1 2 3 4 AM-FM OFF A/C MAX A/C The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel. This outlet should be used in place of the cigarette lighter for optional electrical accessories. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFF SWITCH This switch must be used to deactivate the passenger air bag ON whenever a child seat is used in the OFF right front or center front passenger seat position. Refer to Passenger OFF air bag ON/OFF switch in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. PASSENGER AIRBAG 25
  • 26. USING YOUR AUDIO SYSTEM AM/FM Stereo TONE ST DX SEEK FM CLK TUNE 1 2 3 4 AM/FM Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. TONE VOL 12 VOL PUSH ON VOL PUSH ON VOL PUSH ON Controls and features 26
  • 27. Controls and features If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio mode. AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Seek function The seek function control works in radio mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. AM/FM SEEK TUNE SEEK TUNE 27
  • 28. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with four station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to four preset AM stations and eight FM stations (four in FM1 and four in FM2). Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 1 2 3 4 Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Press the TONE control once, then use the volume knob to adjust the desired level. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Press the TONE control twice, then use the volume knob to adjust the desired level. TONE CLK VOL PUSH ON TONE CLK VOL PUSH ON Controls and features 28
  • 29. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the TONE control three times, then use the volume knob to adjust the desired level. Speaker fade adjust (if equipped) Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Press the TONE control four times, then use the volume knob to adjust the desired level. Setting the clock Press CLK to toggle between listening frequencies and clock mode. To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control until CLOCK SET appears in the display and press the SEEK control: ² to decrease hours and ² to increase hours. Controls and features TONE CLK VOL PUSH ON TONE CLK VOL PUSH ON TONE CLK SEEK SEEK TUNE TUNE 29
  • 30. Controls and features To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control until CLOCK SET appears in the display and press the TUNE control: TONE CLK ² to decrease minutes and SEEK SEEK ² to increase minutes. The CLK control will allow you to TUNE TUNE switch between media display mode (radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time). When in clock mode, the media information will display for ten seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Anytime that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again display for ten seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. AM/FM stereo cassette FM1 ST BASS TREB BAL FADE SCAN SIDE EJ TAPE AMS 1 - 2 REW FF VOL - PUSH ON SEEK TUNE AM FM CLK 1 2 3 4 5 6 30
  • 31. Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. Controls and features VOL - PUSH ON VOL - PUSH ON If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio and tape modes. AM FM AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the AM control to select from AM selections, and press the FM control to select from FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in tape mode Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. 31
  • 32. Controls and features Tune adjust The tune control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. SEEK TUNE ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Seek function The seek function control works in radio mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Scan function The scan function works in radio mode. SEEK TUNE SCAN Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan mode. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 32
  • 33. Controls and features Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM or the FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. BASS TREB 33
  • 34. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Tape select ² To enter tape mode while in radio mode, press the TAPE AMS control. BAL FADE CLK TAPE AMS Automatic Music Search The Automatic Music Search feature allows you to quickly locate the beginning of the tape selection CLK being played or to skip to the next selection. TAPE To activate the feature, momentarily AMS depress the TAPE AMS button. Then, press either REW (for the beginning of the current selection) or FF (to advance to the next Controls and features 34
  • 35. Controls and features selection). The tape deck stops and returns to play mode when the AMS circuit senses a blank section on the tape. In order to ensure proper operation of the AMS feature, the tape MUST have a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs. Rewind The rewind control works in tape mode. To rewind in tape mode, press the REW control. Fast forward The fast forward control works in tape mode. ² In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end of the tape is reached. Tape direction select Press SIDE and 1–2 at the same time to play the alternate side of a tape. Eject function Press the control to stop and eject a tape. SIDE REW FF 1 - 2 SIDE REW FF 1 - 2 SIDE REW FF 1 - 2 EJ DolbyT noise reduction Dolbyt noise reduction operates only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction reduces the amount of 4 hiss and static during tape playback. Press the control to activate (and deactivate) Dolbyt noise reduction. Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 35
  • 36. Controls and features Setting the clock Press CLK to toggle between listening frequencies and clock mode while in radio mode. To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control and press the SEEK control: ² to decrease hours and ² to increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control and press the TUNE control: ² to decrease minutes and ² to increase minutes. CLK TAPE AMS SEEK SEEK TUNE TUNE CLK TAPE AMS SEEK TUNE SEEK TUNE The CLK control will allow you to switch between media display mode (radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time). 36
  • 37. Controls and features When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Anytime that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. AM/FM Stereo / Single CD Radio BASS CD FM1 ST TREB BAL FADE TUNE CD CD SHUFFLE Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. SCN CLK AM FM VOL - PUSH ON SEEK EJ COMP DISC DISCS 1 2 3 4 5 6 VOL - PUSH ON 37
  • 38. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio and CD modes. AM FM AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in CD mode Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio and CD changer mode (if equipped). Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. VOL - PUSH ON CD SEEK TUNE DISCS Controls and features 38
  • 39. Controls and features ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Tune adjust for CD changer (if equipped) ² Press to select the previous SEEK disc in the CD changer. (Play will begin on the first track of the disc unless the CD changer is in TUNE DISCS shuffle mode. Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing through the disc. ² Press to select the next disc in the CD changer. Hold the control to fast-forward through the remaining discs. Seek function The seek function control works in radio or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Seek function for CD mode ² Press to seek to the previous track of the current disc. If a selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you press , the CD changer will replay that selection from the beginning. SEEK TUNE DISCS SEEK TUNE DISCS ² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio or CD mode. SCN 39
  • 40. Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan mode. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. BASS TREB BAL Controls and features 40
  • 41. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. CD select ² To begin CD play (if CD[s] are loaded), press the CD control. The first track of the disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. Controls and features Rewind The rewind control works in CD mode. To rewind in CD mode, press the CD control (preset 1). Press the control again to deactivate rewind mode. Fast forward The fast forward control works in CD mode. To fast forward in CD changer mode, press the CD control (preset 2). Press the control again to deactivate fast forward mode. Eject function Press the control to stop and eject a CD. FADE AM FM CD CD 1 CD 2 EJ 41
  • 42. Compression feature Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. Shuffle feature (if equipped with CD changer) The shuffle feature operates in CD changer mode only and plays all tracks on the current disc in random order. The shuffle feature continues to the next disc after all tracks are played. Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. Setting the clock Press CLK to toggle between listening frequencies and clock mode while in radio mode. To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control and press the SEEK control: ² to decrease hours and ² to increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control and press the TUNE control: COMP SHUFFLE 6 SCN CLK SEEK TUNE DISCS SEEK TUNE DISCS Controls and features 42
  • 43. ² to decrease minutes and ² to increase minutes. Controls and features Premium AM/FM Stereo/Cassette/Single CD DOLBY B NR ST SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL AM FM Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Audio power can also be turned on by pressing the AM/FM select control or the tape/CD select control. Audio power is turned off by using the volume/power control. SEEK TUNE SEEK TUNE FM 1 AMC BL RF REW FF TAPE DISC EJ CD FADE AUTO CLK SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE EJ MUTE VOL PUSH ON SEEK TUNE 1 2 3 4 5 6 VOL - PUSH ON 43
  • 44. Turn control to raise or lower volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio, tape and CD modes. AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in tape mode Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. VOL - PUSH ON AM FM SEEK TUNE SEEK TUNE Controls and features 44
  • 45. Controls and features Seek function The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. SEEK SEEK TUNE TUNE Seek function in tape mode ² Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape. ² Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. Seek function in CD mode ² Press to seek to the previous track of the current disc. ² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio, tape or CD mode. SEEK SEEK TUNE TUNE SCAN Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode. 45
  • 46. Controls and features Scan function in tape mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Setting memory preset stations AM FM 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. Autoset memory preset Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 46
  • 47. Controls and features Starting autoset memory preset 1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 2. Press the AUTO control. 3. When the first six strong stations are filled, the station stored in memory preset control 1 will start playing. If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls (until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner of your original presets. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the AUTO control again. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Press the BASS control then press: ² to decrease the bass output and ² to increase the bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. AUTO CLK BASS TREB SEL BASS TREB 47
  • 48. Press the TREB control then press: ² to decrease the treble output and ² to increase the treble output. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the BAL control then press: ² to shift sound to the left and ² to shift sound to the right. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Press the FADE control then press: ² to shift the sound to the front and ² to shift the sound to the rear. SEL BAL FADE SEL BAL FADE SEL Controls and features 48
  • 49. Tape select ² To begin tape play (with a tape Controls and features loaded into the audio system) while in the radio or CD mode, press the TAPE control. Press the button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward function. Rewind The rewind control works in tape and CD modes. ² In tape mode, radio play will continue until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the current track. Fast forward The fast forward control works in tape and CD modes. ² In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the control fast forwards the CD within the current track. Tape direction select Press SIDE 1–2 to play the alternate side of a tape. Eject function Press the EJ control to stop and eject a tape. TAPE CD REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1-2 3 EJ 49
  • 50. Press the EJ control to stop and eject a CD. EJ DolbyT noise reduction Dolbyt noise reduction operates in tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction reduces the amount of hiss and 4 static during tape playback. Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolbyt noise reduction. Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Compression adjust Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a COMP more consistent listening level. 5 Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. Shuffle feature The shuffle feature operates in CD mode (if equipped) and plays all SHUFFLE tracks on the current disc in random 6 order. If equipped with the CD changer, the shuffle feature continues to the next disc after all tracks on the current disc are played. Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. Controls and features 50
  • 51. Setting the clock To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control and press SEEK: ² to decrease hours and ² to increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control and press TUNE: ² to decrease minutes and ² to increase minutes. If your vehicle has a separate clock module, (other than the digital radio display), the CLK button will not function in the above manner. Controls and features AUTO CLK SEEK SEEK TUNE TUNE AUTO CLK SEEK TUNE SEEK TUNE 51
  • 52. The CLK button will allow you to switch between media display mode (radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time). When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Anytime that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. Mute mode Press the control to mute the playing media. Press the control again to return to the playing media. Cleaning compact discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe the center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion. Cleaning cassette player (if equipped) Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. Cassette and cassette player care ² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. ² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. ² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. ² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. AUTO CLK EJ MUTE Controls and features 52
  • 53. Controls and features ² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. Radio frequency information The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies are: AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz Not all frequencies are used in a given area. Radio reception factors Three factors can affect radio reception: ² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km (24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their strength/volume relative to other stations. ² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. ² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. Audio system warranties and service Refer to the “Warranty Guide” for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 53
  • 54. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL ² Push down to activate the left turn signal. ² Push up to activate the right turn signal. POSITIONS OF THE IGNITION 1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not 4 3 running. 5 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift 2 lever and allows key removal. 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the 1 steering wheel. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Controls and features 54
  • 55. SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) To turn speed control on ² Press ON. Vehicle speed cannot be controlled until the vehicle is traveling at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). Controls and features ON OFF Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. To turn speed control off ² Press OFF or ² Turn off the vehicle ignition. ON OFF Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed will be erased. 55
  • 56. Controls and features To set a speed ² Press SET/SET ACC/SET ACCEL. For speed control to operate, the speed control must be ON and the vehicle speed must be greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). RSM SET ACC COAST If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. Pressing RES/RSM/RESUME will re-engage it. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. To set a higher set speed ² Press and hold SET/SET ACC/ SET ACCEL. Release the control when the desired vehicle speed is reached or ² Press and release SET/SET ACC/ SET ACCEL. Each press will increase the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or ² Accelerate with your accelerator RSM SET ACC COAST pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press and release SET/SET ACC/SET ACCEL. 56
  • 57. Controls and features You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the previously programmed set speed. To set a lower set speed ² Press and hold CST/COAST. Release the control when the desired speed is reached or ² Press and release CST/COAST. Each press will decrease the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or ² Depress the brake pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press SET/SET ACC/ SET ACCEL. RSM SET ACC COAST RSM SET ACC COAST 57
  • 58. To disengage speed control ² Depress the brake pedal or ² Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped). Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed set speed. Pressing OFF will erase the previously programmed set speed. ON OFF Controls and features 58
  • 59. To return to a previously set speed ² Press RES/RSM/RESUME. For RES/RSM/RESUME to operate, the vehicle speed must be faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). Controls and features RSM SET ACC COAST Indicator light (if equipped) This light comes on when either the SET ACC/SET ACCEL or RES/RSM/ SPEED RESUME controls are pressed. It CONT turns off when the speed control OFF control is pressed, the brake is applied or the ignition is turned to the OFF position. OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Activating overdrive (Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. Deactivating overdrive Press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) located on the end of O/D the gearshift lever. The ON/OFF Transmission Control Indicator Light (TCIL) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive. To return to O/D normal overdrive mode, press the ON/OFF Transmission Control Switch again. The TCIL will no longer be illuminated. 59
  • 60. Controls and features When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission Operation section of the Driving chapter. TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) Pull the tilt steering control toward you to move the steering wheel up or down. Hold the control while adjusting the wheel to the desired position, then release the control to lock the steering wheel in position. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. HAZARD FLASHER For information on the hazard flasher control, refer to Hazard flasher in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 60
  • 61. Controls and features WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS Rotate the windshield wiper control to the desired interval, low or high speed position. The bars of varying length are for intermittent wipers. When in this position rotate the control upward for fast intervals and downward for slow intervals. Push (tap) the end of the stalk briefly for a single swipe (no wash). Push and hold for three swipes with wash. Push and hold for a longer wash (up to ten seconds). POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. ² Press the top portion of the rocker switch to close. ² Press the bottom portion of the rocker switch to open. AUTO AUTO 61
  • 62. Controls and features One touch down ² Press AUTO completely down and release quickly. The driver’s window will open fully. Depress again to stop window operation. One touch down can be deactivated during operation by pushing up on the power window control. POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED) Press the top of the control to unlock all doors and the bottom to lock all doors. AUTO UNLOCK LOCK POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED) To adjust your mirrors: 1. Select to adjust the left mirror or to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. 3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 62
  • 63. CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include: ² Utility compartment with cassette/compact disc storage ² Cupholders ² Coin holder slots ² Flip up armrest ² Removable utility bag (if equipped) Controls and features Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo area shade (if equipped) Your vehicle may be equipped with notches in the side trim panels that are used for a cargo area shade. See your dealer for more information. REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key. The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL key fobs (remote entry transmitters) are brought to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. 63
  • 64. Controls and features Unlocking the doors Press this control to unlock the driver’s door. The interior lamps will illuminate. Press the control a second time within five seconds to unlock all doors. Locking the doors Press this control to lock all doors. To confirm all doors are closed and locked, press the control a second time within five seconds. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the lamps will flash. If any of the doors are ajar, the horn will make two quick chirps, reminding you to properly close all doors. Sounding a panic alarm Press this control to activate the alarm. To deactivate the alarm, press the control again or turn the ignition to ACC or ON. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 64
  • 65. Controls and features Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Replacing the battery The transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in operating range can be caused by: ² weather conditions ² nearby radio towers ² structures around the vehicle ² other vehicles parked next to the vehicle To replace the battery: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. 2. Place the positive (+) side of new battery in the same orientation. Refer to the diagram inside the transmitter unit. 3. Snap the two halves back together. 65
  • 66. Controls and features Replacing lost transmitters If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle: ² Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer for programming, or ² Perform the programming procedure yourself Programming remote transmitters It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. To program the transmitters yourself: ² Insert a key in the ignition and turn from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) eight times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds) with the eighth turn ending in the 4 (ON) position. The doors will lock/ unlock to confirm that programming mode has been entered. ² Within 20 seconds, program a 3 2 1 5 4 remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.) ² Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed. ² When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed. 66
  • 67. Controls and features Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm. The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to the RUN or ACC position. The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry system to operate. The inside lights will not turn off if: ² they have been turned on with the dimmer control or ² any door is open. The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 40 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the OFF position. SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system provides an advanced level of vehicle theft protection. Your vehicle’s engine can only be started with the two special SecuriLocky electronically coded keys provided with your vehicle. Each time you start your vehicle, the SecuriLocky key is read by the SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system. If the SecuriLocky key identification code matches the code stored in the SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system, the vehicle’s engine is allowed to start. If the SecuriLocky key identification code does not match the code stored in the system or if a SecuriLocky key is not detected (vehicle theft situation), the vehicle’s engine will not operate. If there is any potential SecuriLocky anti-theft problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL SecuriLocky keys for that vehicle are brought to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Large metallic objects, electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second key on the same key ring as the PATS ignition key may cause vehicle starting concern and record DTC’s under certain conditions. If present, you need to keep these objects from touching the PATS ignition key while starting the engine. These objects and devices cannot damage the PATS ignition key, but can cause a momentary concern if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all 67
  • 68. Controls and features other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make sure the encoded ignition key is an approved Ford encoded ignition key. Spare SecuriLocky keys can be purchased from your dealership and programmed to your SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system. Refer to Programming spare SecuriLocky keys for more information. If one or both of your SecuriLocky keys are lost or stolen and you want to ensure the lost or stolen key will not operate your vehicle, bring your vehicle and all available SecuriLocky keys to your dealership for reinitialization. Theft indicator The theft indicator on the instrument cluster will operate as follows: ² When the ignition is OFF, the theft indicator will flash briefly every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLocky system is protecting your vehicle. ² When the ignition is turned to RUN or START, the theft indicator will light for three seconds and then go out. If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a qualified technician. The Theft indicator is controlled by the SecuriLocky system. During the 30 second prearm state, it is normal to see the theft indicator pulse brighter behind the constant glow. Programming spare SecuriLockY keys Spare SecuriLocky keys can be purchased from your dealership and programmed to your SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system (up to a total of eight keys). Your dealership can program your new SecuriLocky key(s) to your vehicle or you can do it yourself using the following simple procedure. To program a new SecuriLocky key yourself, you will need two previously programmed SecuriLocky keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine). If two previously programmed SecuriLocky keys are not available (one or both of your original keys were lost or stolen), you must bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare SecuriLocky key(s) programmed. 68
  • 69. Controls and features Procedure to program spare SecuriLockY keys to your vehicle New SecuriLocky keys must have the correct mechanical key cut for your vehicle. Conventional (non-SecuriLocky) keys cannot be programmed to your vehicle. You will need to have two previously programmed SecuriLocky keys and the new unprogrammed SecuriLocky key readily accessible for the procedure. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 1. Insert the first previously programmed SecuriLocky key into the ignition and turn the ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON for at least one second). 2. Turn ignition to OFF and remove the first SecuriLocky key from the ignition. 3. Within five seconds of turning the ignition to OFF, insert the second previously programmed SecuriLocky key into the ignition and turn the ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON for at least one second but no more than five seconds). 4. Turn the ignition to OFF and remove the second SecuriLocky key from the ignition. 5. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to OFF, insert the unprogrammed SecuriLocky key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the ignition from OFF to ON (maintain ignition in ON for at least one second). This step will program your new SecuriLocky key. 6. To program additional SecuriLocky key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1. If the programming procedure was successful, the new SecuriLocky key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine. The theft indicator (located on the instrument cluster) will light for three seconds and then go out. If the programming procedure was not successful, the new SecuriLocky key(s) will not operate the vehicle’s engine. The theft indicator will flash on and off. Wait at least one minute and then repeat the procedure from step 1. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare SecuriLocky key(s) programmed. 69
  • 70. Seating and safety restraints SEATING Adjusting the front manual seat Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Reclining the seatback can reduce the effectiveness of the seat’s safety belt in the event of a collision. Lift handle to move seat forward or backward. 70
  • 71. Seating and safety restraints Pull lever up to adjust seatback. Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped) Turn the lumbar support control clockwise to increase firmness. Turn the lumbar support control counterclockwise to increase softness. REAR SEATS Center facing jump seat (2 door SuperCab) (if equipped) To open, pull inboard and down on the seat handle. To stow the seat, pull seat bottom back to the fully upright position. Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. 71
  • 72. Seating and safety restraints Center facing jump seat (4 door SuperCab) (if equipped) To open, pull seat assembly down, then raise seatback. To stow the seat, fold seat back down and raise seat assembly to the fully upright position. Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag SRS is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. 72
  • 73. Seating and safety restraints In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. On four-door SuperCab vehicles, do not open the rear door when the rear seat belt is still buckled. Combination lap and shoulder belts 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. 73
  • 74. Seating and safety restraints The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two types of locking modes described below: Energy Management Feature ² This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. ² This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. Automatic locking mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 74
  • 75. Seating and safety restraints When to use the automatic locking mode ² Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode ² Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. ² Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. ² Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 75
  • 76. Seating and safety restraints How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. 76
  • 77. Seating and safety restraints ² Regular Cab and 4–door Super Cab ² 2–door SuperCab To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision. 77
  • 78. Seating and safety restraints Lap belts Adjusting the front center seat lap belt (if equipped) The lap belt does not adjust automatically. The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips. Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use. Adjusting the rear center facing jump seat lap belt (if equipped) The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out again. 78
  • 79. Seating and safety restraints The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and repeat the procedure above. To unfasten the belt, push in the release button prior to opening the rear door. Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt assembly is too short, even when fully extended, 20 cm (8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by adding a safety belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extension assemblies can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light illuminates1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off. 79
  • 80. Seating and safety restraints Belt minder (if equipped) The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the vehicle has reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON... The Belt Minder feature is activated - the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding... The Belt Minder feature will not activate. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The Belt Minder feature will not activate. The purpose of the Belt Minder is to remind occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the time. 80
  • 81. Seating and safety restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. data) Reasons given... Consider... 9Crashes are rare events9 36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to 9rare9 events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. 9I’m not going far9 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. 9Belts are uncomfortable9 Ford designs its safety belts to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. 9I was in a hurry9 Prime time for an accident. Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. 9Seat belts don’t work9 Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. 9Traffic is light9 Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. 9Belts wrinkle my clothes9 Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. 9The people I’m with don’t wear belts9 Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. 9I have an air bag9 Air bags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. 9I’d rather be thrown clear9 Not a good idea, people who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T 9PICK OUR CRASH9. Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. 81
  • 82. Seating and safety restraints One time disable Anytime the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. Deactivating/activating the belt minder feature Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, make sure that: ² the parking brake is set ² the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). ² the ignition switch is in the OFF position ² all vehicle doors are closed ² the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled ² the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes) ² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during Belt Minder warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. ² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 82
  • 83. Seating and safety restraints 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. ² This will disable Belt Minder if it is currently enabled, or enable Belt Minder if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling Belt Minder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 8. Confirmation of enabling Belt Minder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds again. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, wears or cuts, replacing if necessary. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Maintenance and care section. 83
  • 84. Seating and safety restraints AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OFF 50 40 CHECK ENGINE F H H H E L BRAKE 20 100 60 80 100 120 SEEK Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the event of a collision this module may save information related to the collision including information about the air bag system and impact severity. This information will assist Ford in the servicing of your vehicle and may help Ford better understand real world collisions and further improve the safety of future vehicles. Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying air bag is greatest close to the trim covering the air bag module. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag SRS is provided. RSM SET ACC OFF COAST ON SRS ABS ! P SPEED CONT O/D OFF P R N D 2 1 L L 10 MPH 60 70 30 80 90 km/h 0 0 0 110 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 140 160 20 180 OFF A/C MAX A/C TUNE 1 2 3 4 AM-FM ON OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG 84
  • 85. Seating and safety restraints National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Never place a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless the passenger air bag is turned off. Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag: ² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. ² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Children and air bags For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. 85
  • 86. Seating and safety restraints How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts. The air bags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After air bag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. 86
  • 87. Seating and safety restraints Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. If the air bag is deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. The SRS consists of: ² driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags), ² one or more impact and safing sensors, passenger air bag deactivation switch and diagnostic monitor (RCM) ² a readiness light and tone, ² and the electrical wiring which connects the components. The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the passenger air bag deactivation switch, the impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors). Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster and the passenger air bag deactivate switch or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness section in the Instrumentation chapter or Passenger air bag deactivate switch section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: ² The readiness lights will either flash or stay lit. ² The readiness lights will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. ² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired. 87
  • 88. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including pretensioners) For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch An air bag ON/OFF switch has been installed in this vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Turning the passenger air bag off 1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the key. 2. When the ignition is turned to the ON position the OFF light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts off and then turns back on. This indicates that the passenger air bag is deactivated. ON OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG ON OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG Seating and safety restraints 88
  • 89. Seating and safety restraints If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. Turning the passenger air bag back on The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON. ON 2. The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is turned to ON. This indicates that the passenger air bag is operational. OFF OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG If the light is illuminated when the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows. 89
  • 90. Seating and safety restraints The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial. The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the air bags. Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide. NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada) 1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: ² the vehicle has no rear seat; ² the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or 90
  • 91. Seating and safety restraints ² the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: ² the vehicle has no rear seat; ² although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or ² the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: ² causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and ² makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria. 91
  • 92. Seating and safety restraints Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only) 1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: ² my vehicle has no rear seat; ² the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or ² the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition. 2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because: ² my vehicle has no rear seat; ² although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or ² the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that, according to his or her physician: ² poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and ² makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the Transport Canada deactivation criteria. 92
  • 93. Seating and safety restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. 93
  • 94. Seating and safety restraints Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the special needs of your child with your pediatrician. SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 94
  • 95. Seating and safety restraints When installing a child safety seat: ² Review and follow the information presented in the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter. ² Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). ² Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. ² Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. ² Place seat back in upright position. ² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating positions) (if equipped). Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 95
  • 96. Seating and safety restraints Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move seat all the way back. An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless passenger air bag switch is turned off, See Passenger air bag deactivation switch . Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off. 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 96
  • 97. Seating and safety restraints 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 97
  • 98. Seating and safety restraints 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 98
  • 99. Seating and safety restraints Attaching safety seats with tether straps Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. In Super Cabs equipped with Center Facing Jump Seats, the tether strap anchor bracket should be installed only at the center of the cab’s back panel with the child seat in the front center seating position. Installing an anchor bracket at the right rear of the cab may increase risk of injury to an occupant of the right rear center facing jump seat in the event of a collision or a sudden stop. If a tether child seat is installed in the right front seating position, secure the tether strap to the webbing of the buckled right rear lap belt. You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the cab inner back panel by using a tether anchor kit (613D20) available at no charge from any Ford dealer. Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat. Tether anchorage hardware Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D20) including instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 99
  • 100. Starting PREPARING TO START YOUR VEHICLE Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at high engine RPM. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 100
  • 101. 2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: ² Make sure the parking brake is set. ² Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: ² Make sure the parking brake is set. ² Push the clutch pedal to the floor. Starting 3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 4 If there is difficulty in turning the 3 key, firmly rotate the steering wheel left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur 2 when: ² front wheels are turned 1 ² front wheel is against the curb ² steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 5 101
  • 102. 50 60 70 80 0 0 0 CHECK 40 ENGINE F H H H 30 20 60 80 100 120 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 180 10 MPH 100 140 160 km/h P R N D 2 1 E L ABS L L SPEED CONT O/D OFF 90 110 120 ! BRAKE C 50 60 70 40 80 90 0 0 0 80 100 120 DOOR AJAR CHECK GAGE H H 2 1 0 3 4 5 6 RPMx1000 ABS CHECK ENGINE FUEL RESET <FUEL DOOR E F H 30 20 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 180 10 MPH 100 140 160 km/h 110 120 P R N D 2 1 THEFT SPEED CONT 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW L O/D OFF L ! BRAKE Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. ² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Turn the key to 5 (START) without pressing the accelerator pedal and release as soon as the 4 engine starts. The key will return to 3 4 (ON). 5 2. If the temperature is above –12°C 2 (10°F) and the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 1 seconds and try again. Starting 102
  • 103. Starting 3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to START position. 4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake and release the parking brake. Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only) As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If summer grade (Ed 85) ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol. High-quality blends of winter grade (Ed 85) ethanol will produce satisfactory cold weather starting and driving results. However, fuel composition varies, and sub-optimal winter grade blends could produce increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation at temperatures below –18 degrees C (0 degrees F). If you experience this condition you may find that a different brand of winter grade (Ed 85) (if available in your area) improves the performance of your vehicle. Cold starting performance can also be improved with the use of an engine block heater. The engine block heater is available as a Ford option and can also be obtained from your Ford dealer. Consult the engine block heater section for proper use of the engine block heater. If you should experience cold weather starting problems on (Ed 85) ethanol, and neither an alternative brand of (Ed 85) ethanol nor an engine block heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on (Ed 85) ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two. 103
  • 104. Starting If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions 1. Press the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2 of the way to floor and hold. 2. Turn the key to START position. 3. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 4. If the engine still fails to start, repeat steps one through three. 5. After the engine starts, hold your foot on the brake pedal, put the gearshift lever in gear and release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in a normal manner. Using the engine block heater (if equipped) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23°C (-10°F) or below. Your engine block heater also comes with a battery warmer. The battery warmer wraps around the battery and keeps the battery warm when the engine block heater is plugged in. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 104
  • 105. Starting Guarding against exhaust fumes Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: ² the vehicle is raised for service. ² the sound of the exhaust system changes. ² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves and other debris. 105
  • 106. Driving BRAKES Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or “continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. Rear anti-lock brake system (RABS) Rear Anti-lock Brake System (RABS) is standard equipment on this vehicle. RABS is designed to help you maintain directional stability in emergency stopping situations. With RABS, the rear brakes are kept from locking during panic stops; however, the front wheels can lock because they are not controlled by RABS. A clicking noise and slight pedal pulsation during RABS braking events indicates the RABS is functioning. Pedal pulsation coupled with clicking noise while braking under panic conditions on loose gravel, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s RABS. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. The RABS operates by detecting the onset of rear wheel lockup during brake applications and compensating for this tendency. RABS warning lamp The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. 106
  • 107. Driving With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal ! braking is still effective unless the BRAKE brake warning light also remains illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) Using RABS ² In an emergency, applying full pressure may cause the front wheels to lock. If the front brakes lock, the vehicle cannot be steered. You should apply the brakes with steadily increasing force, as if “squeezing” the brakes. If you feel the front wheels begin to lock, momentarily release the pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. ² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with how the RABS performs. However, avoid unnecessary risks. Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped) On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction. 107
  • 108. ABS warning lamp ABS The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal ! braking is still effective unless the BRAKE brake warning light also remains illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) Using ABS ² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop. ² The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. ² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever BRAKE the vehicle is parked. To set the RELEASE parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops. Driving 108
  • 109. The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released. ! BRAKE Driving Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. Pull the release lever to release the BRAKE brake. Driving with the parking RELEASE brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy. STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer the vehicle. To prevent damage to the power steering pump: ² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. ² Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. 109
  • 110. Driving If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of the following: ² underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) ² high crown in center of road ² high crosswinds ² wheels out of alignment ² loose or worn components in steering linkage PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 110
  • 111. Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies chapter. Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. Driving 111
  • 112. Driving If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Understanding gearshift positions P (Park) Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). Make sure the gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. R (Reverse) With the gearshift in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this gear. 112
  • 113. (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through four. (Overdrive) can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the gearshift lever. The transmission control indicator light (TCIL) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. O/D ON/OFF O/D OFF Driving Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in the position. The O/D OFF indicator will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Transmission operates in gears one through three. (Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: ² driving with a heavy load. ² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. ² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in the Trailer Towing chapter. To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch. The O/D OFF indicator will no longer be illuminated. Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically return to normal overdrive mode. Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in overdrive is not desired. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. Transmission operates only in Second gear. 113
  • 114. Driving 1 (First) Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts can be made by shifting to 2 (Second) or to (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first gear. Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) Understanding gearshift positions Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. P (Park) To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). Make sure the gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. 114
  • 115. R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through five. (Overdrive) can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission control indicator light (TCIL) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. O/D ON/OFF O/D OFF Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in the (Overdrive) position. The TCIL will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Transmission operates in gears one through four. Drive (O/D OFF) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful whenever driving conditions (i.e., city traffic, hilly terrain, etc.) cause the transmission to excessively shift between (Overdrive) and other gears. Deactivate (Overdrive) when: ² driving with a heavy load. ² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. ² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in the Trailer Towing chapter. Driving 115
  • 116. Driving To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch. The TCIL will no longer be illuminated. Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. 1 (First) Use 1 (First) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts can be made by shifting to 2 (Second) or to (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear and will shift to 1 (First) after the vehicle decelerates to the proper vehicle speed. Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: fourth, third, second or first gear. Manual transmission operation (if equipped) Using the clutch Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a starter interlock that prevents Starting the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. When starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 1. Hold down the brake pedal. 2. Depress the clutch pedal. 116
  • 117. 3. Put the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a few seconds. ² Put the gearshift lever in 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 5. Release the clutch slowly while pressing gradually down on the accelerator pedal. ² Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions may reduce clutch life. Parking 1. Apply the brake and shift into N (Neutral). 2. Engage the parking brake. 3. Shift into 1 (First). 4. Turn the ignition to Off. Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. Driving 117
  • 118. Driving Recommended shift speeds Upshifts when accelerating (for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 4H 4L 1 - 2 14 km/h (10 mph) 5 km/h (4 mph) 2 - 3 32 km/h (22 mph) 11 km/h (9 mph) 3 -4 50 km/h (33 mph) 19 km/h (13 mph) 4 - 5 (Overdrive) 71 km/h (41 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy) Transfer case position (if equipped) Shift from: 4H 4L 1 -2 16 km/h (10 mph) 6 km/h (4 mph) 2 - 3 26 km/h (19 mph) 10 km/h (8 mph) 3 - 4 43 km/h (28 mph) 16 km/h (12 mph) 4 - 5 (Overdrive) 68 km/h (40 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph) Maximum downshift speeds Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 4H 4L 5 (Overdrive) - 4 88 km/h (55 mph) 34 km/h (22 mph) 4 - 3 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (18 mph) 3 - 2 56 km/h (35 mph) 21 km/h (14 mph) 2 - 1 32 km/h (20 mph) 11 km/h (8 mph) Reverse Ensure that the vehicle is at a complete stop before shifting into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission. Put the gearshift lever into N and wait at least several seconds before shifting into R. You can shift into R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift lever from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R (Reverse). This is a special lockout feature that protects you from accidentally shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Overdrive). 118
  • 119. Driving FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. When Four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. 4WD power can be selected when additional driving power is desired. If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and the instrument panel control is moved to 4WD Low while the vehicle is moving, the system will not engage and no damage will occur to the 4WD system. Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to a complete stop with the brake pedal depressed and the transmission placed in neutral (or the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmissions). 4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear and decreased fuel economy. 4WD system indicator lights The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible. ² 4WD HIGH -momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4H (4WD High) is engaged. ² 4WD LOW –momentarily 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4L (4WD Low) is engaged. Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) Positions of the electronic shift system 2WD (2WD High) – Power to rear axle only. 4X4 HIGH (4WD High) – Power delivered to front and rear axles for increased traction. 4X4 LOW (4WD Low) – Power to front and rear axles at low speeds. 119
  • 120. Shifting from 2WD (2WD high) to 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 HIGH position. ² At temperatures below 0°C (32°F), shifts from 2WD to 4X4 HIGH should not be performed above 72 km/h (45 mph). Do not shift into 4X4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW Shifting from 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) to 2WD (2WD high) Move the 4WD control to 2WD position at any forward speed. ² You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage your front hubs. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW Shifting from 2WD (2WD high) to 4X4 LOW (4WD low) 1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress the clutch (manual transmission). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 LOW position. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW Driving 120
  • 121. Driving Shifting from 4X4 LOW (4WD low) to 2WD (2WD high) 1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress the clutch (manual transmission). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 2WD position. 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW Shifting between 4X4 HIGH (4WD high) and 4X4 LOW (4WD low) 1. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress the clutch (manual transmission). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 4X4 HIGH or 4X4 LOW position. 2WD 4X4 LOW 4X4 HIGH Driving off-road with 4WD Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. 121
  • 122. Driving Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. For more information on driving off-road, read the “Four Wheeling” supplement in your owner’s portfolio. If your vehicle gets stuck If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. Mud and water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. 122
  • 123. Driving After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. Water intrusion into the transmission may damage the transmission. Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required. Driving on hilly or sloping terrain When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over the crest. When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear when added engine braking is desired. When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load. If vehicle speed drops more than 16 km/h (10 mph), the speed control will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal. If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 50 km/h [30 mph]). Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of (Overdrive) into a lower gear. Driving on snow and ice A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. 123
  • 124. Driving Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady pressure on the brake pedal. Allow more stopping distance and drive slower than usual. Consider using one of the lower gears. TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. 124
  • 125. Driving VEHICLE LOADING Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: ² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include passengers or aftermarket equipment. ² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, passengers and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating minus base curb weight. ² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. ² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum total weight of the base vehicle, passengers, optional equipment and cargo. The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Compliance Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Compliance Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the trailer. ² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum combined weight of towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the trailer. The GCWR indicates the maximum loaded weight that the vehicle is designed to tow. ² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/ transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle (including passengers and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. 125
  • 126. Driving Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. The Certification Label, found on the inside pillar of the driver’s door, lists several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the number of passengers or amount of cargo carried). You may add equipment throughout your vehicle if the total weight added is equal to or less than the total axle reserve capacity (TARC) weight. You should NEVER exceed the total axle reserve capacity. Always ensure that the weight of passengers, cargo and equipment being carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and Front and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this owner guide. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 126
  • 127. Driving Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) chart to find the maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. 2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. 3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight on the chart. TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation. 127
  • 128. Driving Trailer towing table (4x2 manual transmission) Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) (0-maximum) Maximum frontal area of trailer-m2 (ft2) Regular Cab 4x2 2.5L 3.73 2 177 (4 800) 0-717 (0-1 580) Equal to frontal area of base vehicle 2.5L 4.10 2 177 (4 800) 0-717 (0-1 580) Equal to frontal area of base vehicle 3.0L 3.73 2 721 (6 000) 0-1 207 (0-2 660) 4.64 (50) 3.0L Torsion Bar Sus-pension 4.10 2 721 (6 000) 0-1 179 (0-2 600) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.55 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 633 (0-3 600) 4.64 (50) SuperCab 4x2 2.5L 3.73 2 177 (4 800) 0-617 (0-1 360) Equal to frontal area of base vehicle 2.5L 4.10 2 177 (4 800) 0-617 (0-1 360) Equal to frontal area of base vehicle 3.0L 3.73 2 271 (6 000) 0-1 116 (0-2 460) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.55 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 542 (0-3 400) 4.64 (50) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 ft.) elevation. For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. 128
  • 129. Driving Trailer towing table (4x2 manual transmission) Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Trailer tow table (4x4 manual transmission) Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) Maximum frontal area of trailer-m2 (ft2) Regular Cab 3.0L 3.73 2 721 (6 000) 0-1 089 (0-2 400) 4.64 (50) 3.0L 4.10 2 721 (6 000) 0-1 089 (0-2 400) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.73 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 515 (0-3 340) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 4.10 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 515 (0-3 340) 4.64 (50) SuperCab 3.0L 3.73 2 721 (6 000) 0-998 (0-2 200) 4.64 (50) 3.0L 4.10 2 721 (6 000) 0-998 (0-2 200) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.73 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 433 (0-3 160) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 4.10 3 175 (7 000) 0-1 433 (0-3 160) 4.64 (50) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 ft.) of elevation. For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). 129
  • 130. Driving Trailer towing table (4x2 automatic transmission) Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) (0-maximum) Maximum frontal area of trailer-m2 (ft2) Regular Cab 4x2 2.5L 4.10 2 494 (5 500) 0-989 (2 180) Equal to frontal area of base vehicle 3.0L 3.73 3 401 (7 500) 0-1 869 (0-4 120) 4.64 (50) 3.0L Torsion Bar Suspension 4.10 3 401 (7 500) 0-1 842 (0-4 060) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.55 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 749 (0-6 060) 4.64 (50) SuperCab 4x2 3.0L 3.73 3 401 (7 500) 0-1 778 (0-3 920) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.55 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 658 (0-5 860) 4.64 (50) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 ft.) elevation. For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). 130
  • 131. Driving Trailer tow table (4x4 automatic transmission) Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) Maximum frontal area of trailer-m2 (ft2) Regular Cab 3.0L 3.73 3 401 (7 500) 0-1 751 (0-3 860) 4.64 (50) 3.0L 4.10 3 628 (8 000) 0-1 978 (0-4 360) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.73 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 631 (0-5 800) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 4.10 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 631 (0-5 800) 4.64 (50) SuperCab 3.0L 3.73 3 401 (7 500) 0-1 660 (0-3 660) 4.64 (50) 3.0L 4.10 3 628 (8 000) 0-1 887 (0-4 160) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 3.73 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 549 (5 620) 4.64 (50) 4.0L 4.10 4 309 (9 500) 0-2 549 (0-5 620) 4.64 (50) For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300 meters (1 000 ft.) of elevation. For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter. To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see Calculating the load earlier in this chapter. Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. 131
  • 132. Driving Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance. Hitches For towing trailers up to 907 kg (2 000 lb), use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distrubuting hitch for trailers over 907 kg (2 000 lb). Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious gases or water from entering. Safety chains Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you. Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. 132
  • 133. Driving Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR. Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps. Using a step bumper The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires only a ball with a 19 mm (3/4 inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 907 kg (2 000 lb.) trailer weight and 91 kg (200 lb.) tongue weight capability. The rated capcities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse. Trailer tow connector The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Refer to the following chart for information regarding the factory-equipped trailer tow connector: 1 2 3 4 133
  • 134. Driving Trailer tow connector Color Function Comment 1. Dark Green Trailer right hand turn signal Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and right hand turn signal is applied. 2. Yellow Trailer left hand turn signal Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and left hand turn signal is applied. 3. Tan/White Tail lamp Relay controlled circuit activated when the park lamps/headlamps are on. 4. White Ground Matching vehicle circuit returns to battery’s negative ground. Driving while you tow When towing a trailer: ² Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. ² Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. ² Use a lower gear when towing up or down steep hills. This will eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. ² Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Exceeding the GCWR rating may cause internal transmission damage and void your warranty coverage. Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance guide for more information. Trailer towing tips ² Practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. 134
  • 135. Driving ² Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. ² The trailer tongue weight should be no more than 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight. ² After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. ² When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmissions) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions). This aids engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. ² Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. Launching or retrieving a boat When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval, ² Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper and ² Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions, reliability and causing internal transmission damage. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the axle has been submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water. 135
  • 136. Driving Recreational towing Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles equipped with manual transmissions Before you have your vehicle towed: ² Release the parking brake. ² Move the gearshift to N (Neutral). ² Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. ² The maximum recommended speed is 88 km/h (55 mph). ² The maximum recommended distance is unlimited. In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions provided by the after market manufacturer of the towing apparatus if one has been installed. 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions For all cars, 4x2 truck/sports utility with automatic transmissions, or 4x4 truck/sport utility with manual transfer cases and automatic transmissions, follow these guidelines for recreational towing: ² Release the parking brake. ² Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position. ² Place the transmission in N (Neutral). ² Do not exceed a distance of 80 km (50 miles). ² Do not exceed 56 km/h (35 mph) vehicle speed. If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components. CAMPER BODIES Your Ranger Pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies. 136
  • 137. Roadside emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: ² 24–hours, seven days a week ² for the Basic warranty period (Canada) or New Vehicle Limited Warranty period (U.S.) of three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever comes first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles Roadside assistance will cover: ² changing a flat tire ² jump-starts ² lock-out assistance ² fuel delivery ² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford dealership, or your selling dealer if within 25 kms (15.5 miles) of the nearest Ford Dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, it is found in the Roadside Assistance book in the glove compartment. To receive roadside assistance in the United States for Ford or Mercury vehicles, call 1-800-241-3673 or if you own a Lincoln vehicle, call 1–800–521–4140. In Canada call 1–800–665–2006. Should you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain information about reimbursement, call 1-800-241-3673 in the United States for Ford or Mercury vehicles; or if you own a Lincoln vehicle, call 1–800–521–4140. Call 1–800–665–2006 in Canada. 137
  • 138. Roadside emergencies Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Similarly in Canada, you may purchase additional coverage beyond the basic coverage period by consulting the Ford Roadside Assistance Club brochure or by calling 1–877–294–CLUB (1–877–894–2582). HAZARD FLASHER Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the ignition is off. ² The hazard lights control is located on top of the steering column. ² Depress hazard lights control to activate all hazard flashers simultaneously. ² Depress control again to turn the flashers off. RESETTING THE FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. The “Fuel Reset” indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster. 138
  • 139. The fuel pump shut-off switch is located in the passenger’s foot well, by the kick panel. Roadside emergencies Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the OFF position. 5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 139
  • 140. Roadside emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 15 Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Rating Mini Fuses Standard Fuses Maxi Fuses Cartridge Maxi Fuses Fuse Link Cartridge 2A Grey Grey — — — 3A Violet Violet — — — 4A Pink Pink — — — 5A Tan Tan — — — 7.5A Brown Brown — — — 10A Red Red — — — 15A Blue Blue — — — 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural — — — 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A — — Orange Green Green 50A — — Red Red Red 60A — — Blue — Yellow 70A — — Tan — Brown 80A — — Natural — Black 140
  • 141. Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located on the left hand side of the instrument panel facing the driver’s side door. Pull the panel cover outward to access the fuses. Roadside emergencies To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 29 30 35 36 31 32 34 33 27 28 141
  • 142. Roadside emergencies The fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Location Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 1 7.5A Power Mirror Switch 2 7.5A Blower Motor Relay, PAD Module, Air Bag Diagnostic Monitor 3 7.5A Left Stop/Turn Trailer Tow Connector 4 10A Left Headlamp 5 — Not Used 6 15A Overdrive, Back-up Lamps, DRL, 4x4 7 7.5A Right Stop/Turn Trailer Tow Connector 8 10A Right Headlamp, Fog Lamp Relay 9 7.5A Brake Pedal Position Switch 10 7.5A Speed Control Servo/Amplifier Assembly, Generic Electronic Module (GEM), Shift Lock Actuator, Blend Door Actuator, A/C-Heater Assembly, Turn Signals 11 7.5A Instrument Cluster, Daytime Running Lights (DRL), RABS Resistor 12 — Not Used 13 20A Brake Pedal Position Switch 14 20A or 10A 20A: If equipped with Rear Anti-Lock Brake System (RABS) Module. 10A: If equipped with 4 Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) Module, 4WABS Main Relay 15 7.5A Air Bag Indicator Lamp, Alternator Indicator Lamp 16 30A Windshield Wiper Motor, Wiper Hi-Lo Relay, Wiper Run/Park Relay 17 25A Cigar Lighter, Data Link Connector (DLC) 18 15A Driver’s Unlock Relay, All-Unlock Relay, All-Lock Relay 19 25A PCM Power Diode, Ignition, PATS 20 7.5A RAP Module, Generic Electronic Module (GEM), Radio 142
  • 143. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 21 15A Flasher (Hazard) 22 20A Auxiliary Power Socket 23 — Not Used 24 7.5A Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch, Starter Interrupt Relay, Anti-Theft 25 — Not Used 26 10A Battery Saver Relay, Electronic Shift Relay, Interior Lamp Relay, Power Window Relay, Electronic Shift Control Module, Dome/Map Lamp, GEM, Instrument Cluster 27 — Not Used 28 7.5A Generic Electronic Module (GEM), Radio 29 15A Radio 30 10A RABS Test Connector 31 — Not Used 32 — Not Used 33 15A Headlamps, Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Module, Instrument Cluster 34 — Not Used 35 — Not Used 36 — Not Used Roadside emergencies 143
  • 144. Roadside emergencies Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and care chapter. 144
  • 145. The high-current fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Location Rating Power Distribution Box Description 1 50A** I/P Fuse Panel 2 40A** Blower Motor Relay 3 50A** 4 Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) Module 4 20A** Power Windows 5 50A** Ignition Switch, Starter Relay 1 10A* A/C Relay 2 — Not Used 3 20A* Electronic Shift Relay and Electronic Shift Control Module 4 20A* Fog Lamp and Daytime Running Lamps 5 15A Trailer Tow Park Lamps 6 10A* Powertrain Control Module 7 30A* 4 Wheel Anti-lock Brake System (4WABS) Module 8 30A* PCM Relay 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 9 6 10 8 7 5 2 1 1 4 1 3 2 125 MEGAFUSE 11 13 12 14 Roadside emergencies 145
  • 146. Roadside emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description 9 20A* Fuel Pump Relay and RAP Module 10 15A* Horn Relay 11 15A* Parklamps Relay and Main Light Switch 12 30A* Main Light Switch and Multifunction Switch 13 15A* Heated Oxygen Sensor, EGR Vacuum Regulator, EVR Solenoid, Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP), Canister Vent Solenoid 14 30A* Alternator Voltage Regulator 15 — Not Used 1 — Wiper Park Relay 2 — A/C Relay 3 — Wiper Hi/Lo Relay 4 — PCM Power Relay 5 — Fuel Pump Relay 6 — Starter Relay 7 — Horn Relay 8 — Fog Lamp Control Relay 9 — Blower Motor Relay 10 — Foglamp Isolation Relay 11 — Not Used 12 — Not Used 13 — Park Lamp/Trailer Tow Relay 14 — Washer Pump Relay 1 — RABS Resistor 1 — RABS Diode 2 — Electronic Engine Controls Diode * Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses 146
  • 147. Roadside emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Temporary spare tire information Your vehicle may have a temporary or conventional spare tire. The temporary spare tire for your vehicle is labeled as such. It is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Replace this tire with a full-size tire as soon as possible. It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary spare. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 16 km/h (10 mph) or for distances above 80 km (50 miles). If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. When driving with the temporary spare tire do not: ² exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) under any circumstances ² load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label ² tow a trailer ² use tire chains ² drive through an automatic car wash, because of the vehicle’s reduced ground clearance ² try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its wheel ² use the wheel for any other type of vehicle Conventional spare tire information If you have the conventional spare tire, you can use it as a spare or a regular tire. The spare is identical to the other tires on your vehicle, although the wheel may not match. 147
  • 148. Roadside emergencies Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations: Tool Location Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper Jack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the jack and tools cover SuperCab: stowed in the passenger side rear cab compartment or behind the jump seat in a separate tool bag Four-door models: stowed behind the front seats, between jump seats and underneath jack and tools cover. Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) In the glove box Removing the spare tire 1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the illustrations. When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following: ² one handle extension and one typical extension. To assemble, slide parts together. To disconnect, depress button and pull apart. ² one wheel nut wrench. Depress button and slide together. 148
  • 149. 2. If equipped, unlock and remove the spare tire carrier lock from the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate. Roadside emergencies 3. Insert the straight end of the jack handle into the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate. Forward motion will stop and resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged. 4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack. 5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. Stowing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 2. Install the retainer through the wheel center and slide the wheel under the vehicle. 3. Turn the spare handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath the vehicle. The spare handle ratchets when the tire is raised to the stowed position. It will not allow you to overtighten. 149
  • 150. Roadside emergencies 4. If your vehicle is equipped with P265/75 R15 AT tires, do not stow a flat or inflated full size spare tire in the spare tire carrier. The flat full size tire should be stowed and tied down in the pickup box bed until it can be repaired. 5. If removed, install the spare tire carrier lock on the access hole above the bumper. Tire change procedure To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and place gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). 2. Set the parking brake and turn engine OFF. 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. 150
  • 151. 4. Insert tapered end of the lug wrench behind hub caps and twist them off. 5. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 6. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 25 mm (1 inch) off the ground. ² Front ² Rear Roadside emergencies 151
  • 152. Roadside emergencies To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. ² Never use the differential as a jacking point. 7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug wrench. 8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 10. Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. 11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the spare tire. 3 4 12. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 5 2 13. Unblock the wheels. JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Do not push start your vehicle. You could damage the catalytic converter. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and clothing, if contacted. 152
  • 153. Roadside emergencies Do not attempt to push start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Preparing your vehicle 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. Connecting the jumper cables + – + – 1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 153
  • 154. + – Roadside emergencies + – 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. 154
  • 155. Roadside emergencies Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. Removing the jumper cables + – + – Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. 155
  • 156. + – Roadside emergencies + – 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. + – + – 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. + – + – 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 156
  • 157. WRECKER TOWING Roadside emergencies If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground. On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. Ford Motor Company provides a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 157
  • 158. Maintenance and care SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: ² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. ² We provide a Scheduled Maintenance Guide which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Guide” to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. ² Do not work on a hot engine. ² When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or long hair does not get caught up in moving parts. ² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. ² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in Battery in this chapter. Working with the engine off ² Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. ² Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 158
  • 159. 3. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Working with the engine on ² Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. ² Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. OPENING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood. 3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod. Maintenance and care 159
  • 160. Maintenance and care IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.5L I4 engine 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 10 9 8 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Power distribution box 7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 8. Battery 9. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Engine oil filler cap 11. Air filter assembly 160
  • 161. 3.0L V6 engine Maintenance and care 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 10 9 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 5. Engine oil dipstick 6. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Power distribution box 8. Clutch fluid reservoir 9. Battery 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Air filter assembly 8 161
  • 162. Maintenance and care 4.0L OHV V6 engine 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Power distribution box 8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 9. Battery 10. Air filter assembly 11. Engine coolant reservoir 162
  • 163. Maintenance and care ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). ADD 1QT FULL 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. ² If the oil level is between the ADD and FULL marks or between the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. MIN MAX 163
  • 164. Maintenance and care ² If the oil level is below the ADD mark or MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the ADD-FULL range or MIN-MAX range. ² Oil levels above the letter F in FULL or the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark or the letter F in FULL on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until three clicks can be heard. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 164
  • 165. Maintenance and care Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark. Use SAE 5W-30 motor oil certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Motor oil displaying the API certification trademark will meet all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. Ford oil specification is WSS-M2C153-G. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 165
  • 166. Maintenance and care BRAKE FLUID Checking and adding brake fluid Brake fluid should be checked and refilled as needed. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the service interval schedules. 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir. 2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 3. If necessary, add brake fluid from a clean un-opened container until the level reaches MAX. Do not fill MAX above this line. 4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in the Capacities and specifications chapter. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. 166
  • 167. CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the service interval schedules. During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications. Refer to Capacities and specifications. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir. 2. Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir. 3. Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir. 4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir. Maintenance and care 167
  • 168. Maintenance and care WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Checking and adding washer fluid Check the washer fluid whenever you stop for fuel. The reservoir is highlighted with a symbol. If the level is low, add enough fluid to fill the reservoir. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir all the way. WASHER FLUID ONLY RADIATOR COOLANT ONLY Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications in the Capacities and specifications chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-10), or an equivalent premium engine coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. 168
  • 169. Maintenance and care A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Ford Premium Engine Coolant provides: ² maximum cooling system efficiency. ² freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). ² boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). ² protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. ² an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant gauge. The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to the engine and cooling system may result. When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. RADIATOR COOLANT ONLY ² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). ² Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval schedules. ² Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. 169
  • 170. Maintenance and care Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Adding engine coolant Use only Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-10) or a premium engine coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. ² DO NOT USE Ford Extended Life Engine Coolant F6AZ-19544-AA (orange in color). ² DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLt engine coolant or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford specification WSS-M97B44-D. ² DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. ² DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system. ² DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. ² The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, contact your local dealer. Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield, it could make it difficult to see through the windshield. When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir, until the coolant is at the “cold fill level” or within the “ cold fill range” as listed in the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). ² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. ² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. ² Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. 170
  • 171. Maintenance and care Plain water may be added in an emergency, but you must replace it with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before you drive your vehicle the next few times (with the engine cool). If necessary, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the reservoir (depending upon application). Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month. To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being released from the engine cooling system, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to the engine’s cooling system and possible severe personal injury. If you must remove the radiator cap, follow these steps to avoid personal injury: 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet the Ford specification may harm engine and cooling system components. Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. 171
  • 172. Maintenance and care Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in the Capacities and specifications chapter. Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): ² it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. ² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. ² increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: ² it is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. ² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. ² decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. 172
  • 173. Maintenance and care CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCONt ATF. 1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C). 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows in the FULL HOT range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the FULL HOT range. Be sure to put the dipstick back in the reservoir. TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been 173
  • 174. Maintenance and care operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving. You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). 174
  • 175. Maintenance and care The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant specifications section in the Capacities and specifications chapter. Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. If necessary, add fluid in 250 mL (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. 175
  • 176. Maintenance and care Checking and adding manual transmission fluid 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Fluid level should be at bottom of the opening. 4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities and specifications chapter. 176
  • 177. Maintenance and care Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped) 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Capacities and specifications chapter. DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. 177
  • 178. Maintenance and care BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 178
  • 179. Maintenance and care Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. ² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 179
  • 180. Maintenance and care ² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected. ² Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. LEAD RETURN RECYCLE WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES Check the wiper blades at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. Checking the wiper blades If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. 180
  • 181. Changing the wiper blades To replace the wiper blades: 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and lock into the service position. 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. Maintenance and care INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: ² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. 181
  • 182. Maintenance and care Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 182
  • 183. Maintenance and care SERVICING YOUR TIRES Checking the tire pressure ² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. ² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). ² Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the Certification Label. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. Tire rotation Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, if your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that only the front wheels be rotated (side to side). ² Four tire rotation 183
  • 184. Maintenance and care ² Five tire rotation Replacing the tires Replace the tires when the wear band is visible through the tire treads. When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 184
  • 185. Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose control and roll over. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains,it is recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and specifications as those originally installed. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: ² Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the wheels. ² Use only SAE Class S chains. ² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. ² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. ² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. ² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Maintenance and care 185
  • 186. Maintenance and care ² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel system to work improperly in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: ² Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. ² Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. ² Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause 186
  • 187. Maintenance and care death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. ² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. ² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. ² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. ² Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. ² FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent or more of ethanol. Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as “Fuel Ethanol (E85)”. Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane. When ethanol is used in the making of motor fuels, a small amount of a bad tasting chemical is added to discourage beverage use. The resulting fuel is called Ed 100 meaning 100% pure ethanol diluted by 2% to 5% gasoline as the “denaturant.” Fuel ethanol (Ed 85) is then made by adding 15% more unleaded gasoline. The resulting fuel also has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular gasoline and other properties which allow engine designs with greater efficiency and power. Winter blends may contain up to 30% unleaded gasoline (25% plus the denaturant) to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to Cold Weather Starting in the Starting chapter. 187
  • 188. Maintenance and care Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers. Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures, damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: ² Place approved fuel container on the ground. ² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle. ² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. ² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 188
  • 189. Maintenance and care 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays on when you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel system to work improperly in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED FUEL and ETHANOL (E85). The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. 189
  • 190. Octane recommendations Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most 87 driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended (R+M)/2 METHOD octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. Unleaded Gasoline engines Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. FFV engine Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol (E85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation E85 or the appropriate percentage for that region. Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be invalidated. Fuel quality Many of the world’s automakers issued the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Unleaded Gasoline engines If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded Maintenance and care 190
  • 191. Maintenance and care gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. FFV engine Your FFV will operate well on ordinary “Regular” unleaded gasoline, but only the highest quality fuel ethanol will provide the same level of protection and performance. Standards for fuel ethanol have been developed to provide FFVs the best possible performance, safety and durability. To assist alcohol fuel providers in meeting these standards, guidelines have also been developed which prescribe “Ethanol Fuel Compatible” dispensing station equipment. These standards and guidelines can be obtained from Ford Motor Company. Fuel stations may apply to be certified as meeting these standards. However, not all stations meet these standards at this time. To ensure proper operation of your FFV on fuel ethanol, refuel at certified stations. If you are experiencing a rough or rolling idle after start-up with the outside temperature above 27° C (80° F), the idle should improve within 10 to 30 seconds. If the problems persist below this temperature, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Cleaner air Ford approves the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. These gasolines may contain oxygenates up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: ² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. ² Your “Check Engine” indicator may come on. For more information on the “Check Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrumentation chapter. 191
  • 192. Maintenance and care Fuel Filter For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill Capacities section of the Capacities and specifications chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of usable fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: ² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. ² Allow three automatic click-offs when filling. ² Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. 192
  • 193. ² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. ² Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. ² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters or gallons). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Ethanol has less energy per gallon than gasoline. Fuel economy will decrease as the percentage of ethanol used is increased. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. Habits ² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. ² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. Maintenance and care 193
  • 194. Maintenance and care ² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. ² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. ² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. ² Slow down gradually. ² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). ² Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. ² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. ² You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. ² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. ² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. ² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance ² Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. ² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. ² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant Specifications. ² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle Scheduled Maintenance Guide. Conditions ² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. ² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). ² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. 194
  • 195. Maintenance and care ² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. ² Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. ² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. ² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. ² Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. ² Close windows for high speed driving. EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: ² Use only unleaded fuel (or E85, if equipped with the 3.0L FFV V6 engine). ² Avoid running out of fuel. ² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. ² Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. 195
  • 196. Maintenance and care If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your “Warranty Guide” for complete emission warranty information. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning Lights and Chimes section of the Instrumentation chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: ² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. 196
  • 197. Maintenance and care ² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. BULBS Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: ² Headlamps ² Foglamps ² High-mount brakelamp ² Brakelamps ² Turn signals ² License plate lamp ² Tail lamps ² Back-up lamps Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. Replacing headlamp bulbs To remove the headlamp bulb: 1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 3. Locate the headlamp bulb through the hole in the upper radiator support assembly. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 197
  • 198. Maintenance and care 5. Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating it counterclockwise (when viewed from the rear) to free it from the bulb socket, and slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring to retain the new bulb. 6. Without turning, remove the old bulb by gently pulling it straight back out of the lamp assembly. To install the new bulb: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly. 2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. 198
  • 199. Replacing front side marker bulbs 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove two screws from the lamp assembly. 3. Disengage lamp assembly (it has a snap fit). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. Maintenance and care 5. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and remove from lamp assembly. 6. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. 7. Insert the bulb into the parking lamp assembly. When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly and turn to lock. 8. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it “snaps.” 9. Align the lamp studs with the plastic grommets on the vehicle and push to snap in place. 10. Install two screws on lamp assembly. 199
  • 200. Maintenance and care Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs The tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb: 1. Open the liftgate to expose the lamp assemblies. 2. Remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from vehicle. 3. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise turn and remove from lamp assembly. 4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. 5. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 6. Install the lamp assembly and secure with four screws. Replacing foglamp bulbs 1. Remove the bulb socket from the foglamp by turning counterclockwise. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the new foglamp bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp turning clockwise. 200
  • 201. Maintenance and care Replacing high-mount brakelamp and cargo lamp bulbs The replacement of the high-mount brakelamp bulb and cargo lamp bulb is basically the same. This procedure covers the high-mount brakelamp bulb. To remove the brakelamp assembly: 1. Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle. 2. Remove the bulb socket from lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise. 3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. To install the brakelamp assembly: 1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise. 2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. To change the license plate lamp bulbs: 1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb socket. 2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove. 3. Pull out the old bulb from socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise. Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 201
  • 202. Maintenance and care Function Number of bulbs Trade number Park/turn/side marker lamps (front) 4 3157 2 194 Headlamps 2 9007 Foglamps (if 2 equipped) 9006 HB4 Hi-mount brakelamp 1 922 Cargo lamps 2 906 Rear stop/turn/tail 2 lamps 3157 Rear license plate lamps 2 194 Backup lamp 2 3156 Dome lamp 1 912 Map/dome-SuperCab 2 904 (if equipped) Map/dome-Regular Cab (if equipped) 1 904 1 904 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer. REPLACING THE INTERIOR BULBS Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: ² interior overhead lamp ² map lamp For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified service technician. 202
  • 203. Maintenance and care CLEANING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE Refer to the Customer Assistance chapter for a list of Ford-approved cleaners, polishes and waxes. Washing your vehicle Wash your vehicle regularly with cold or lukewarm water. Never use strong detergents or soap. If your vehicle is particularly dirty, use a quality car wash detergent. Always use a clean sponge, washing glove or similar device and plenty of water for best results. To avoid spots, avoid washing when the hood is still warm, immediately after or during exposure to strong sunlight. During winter months, it is especially important to wash the vehicle on a regular basis. Large quantities of dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and also cause damage to the vehicle. Any gasoline spilled on the vehicle or deposits such as bird droppings should be washed and sponged off as soon as possible. Deposits not removed promptly can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork. Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. If you have wax applied to the vehicle at a commercial car wash, it is recommended that you clean the wiper blades and windshield as described in Cleaning the wiper blades and windshield. After washing, apply the brakes several times to dry them. Waxing your vehicle Waxing your vehicle on a regular basis will reduce minor scratches and paint damage. Wax when water stops beading on the surface. This could be every three or four months, depending on operating conditions. Use only carnauba or synthetic-based waxes. Use a cleaning fluid with a clean cloth to remove any bugs before waxing your vehicle. Use tar remover to remove any tar spots. Avoid getting wax on the windshield, or on any surfaces which appear coarse or bumpy. If you have wax applied at a commercial car wash, it is 203
  • 204. Maintenance and care recommended that you clean the wiper blades and windshield as described in Cleaning the wiper blades and windshield. Repairing paint chips Minor scratches or paint damage from road debris may be repaired with the Ultra Touch Prep and Finishing Kit (#F7AZ-19K507–BA), Lacquer Touch-up Paint (#ALBZ-19500–XXXXA), or Exterior Acrylic Spray Lacquer (#ALAZ-19500–XXXXA) from the Ford Car Care Chemicals line. Please note that the part numbers (shown as XXXX above) will vary with your vehicle’s specific coloring. Observe the application instructions on the products. Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout immediately. Cleaning the wheels Wash with the same detergent as the body of your vehicle. Do not use acid-based or alcohol-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuel or strong detergents. Never use abrasives that will damage the finish of special wheel surfaces. Use a tar remover to remove grease and tar. The brushes used in some automatic car washes may damage the finish on your wheels. Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are abrasive. Cleaning the engine Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: ² Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. ² Do not spray with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. ² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. 204
  • 205. ² 4.0L ² 3.0L Maintenance and care 205
  • 206. Maintenance and care ² 2.5L ² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. Cleaning non-painted plastic exterior parts Use vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. Clean with a tar remover if necessary. Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. Cleaning the exterior lamps Wash with the same detergent as the exterior of your vehicle. If necessary, use a tar remover such as Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover (B7A-19520–AA). To avoid scratching the lamps, do not use a dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. Cleaning the wiper blades, windshield and rear window If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean the wiper blade rubber element with undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. If the wiper still does not wipe properly, this could be caused by substances on the windshield or rear window such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes. Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ford 206
  • 207. Maintenance and care Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, (E4AZ-19C507–AA), available from your Ford Dealer. Do not use abrasive cleansers on glass as they may cause scratches. The windshield or rear window is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis, and blades or rubber elements replaced when worn. Cleaning the instrument panel Clean with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. Avoid cleaner or polish that increases the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air bag system. Cleaning the instrument cluster lens Clean with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the lens. Cleaning the interior fabric Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Do not use household or glass cleaners. These agents can stain and discolor the fabric. Use a mild soap and water solution if necessary. Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts Clean the safety belts with a mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belts, because these actions may weaken the belt webbing. Check the safety belt system periodically to make sure there are no nicks, wear or cuts. If your vehicle has been involved in an accident, refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Underbody Flush the complete underside of vehicle frequently. Keep body drain holes unplugged. Inspect for road damage. 207
  • 208. Maintenance and care Inside windows Use Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA) for the inside windows if they become fogged. Cleaning mirrors Do not clean your mirrors with a dry cloth or abrasive materials. Use a soft cloth and mild detergent and water. Be careful when removing ice from outside mirrors because you may damage the reflective surface. 208
  • 209. Capacities and specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 2.5L I4 engine 3.0L FFV V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine Air filter element FA-1658 FA-1658 FA-1658 Fuel filter FG-1002 FG-1002 FG-1002 Battery BXT-59 BXT-59 BXT-59 Oil filter FL-400S FL-400S FL-1A PCV valve EV-227 EV-130 EV-225 Spark plugs* AWSF-32F** AGSF-22PP*** AGSF-22PP*** * Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. ** Two spark plugs per cylinder required (eight total). *** If any spark plug needs to be removed for inspection, it must be re-installed in the same cylinder. Cylinders No.1, 2 and 3 have a “PG” suffix. Cylinders No. 4, 5 and 6 have a “P” suffix. If any spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the service part number suffix letters “PP” as shown on the engine decal. REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Engine oil (includes filter change) Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil 2.5L I4 and 3.0L V6 engine 4.3L (4.5 quarts) 4.0L V6 engine 4.7L (5.0 quarts) Brake fluid High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid All Fill to line on reservoir Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCONt ATF All Fill to range on dipstick 209
  • 210. Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Transmission fluid 1 Motorcraft MERCONt ATF 5-speed manual 2.65L (2.8 quarts) 2 Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF 4x2 vehicles with automatic and 2.5L I4 engine 9.4L (9.9 quarts) 3 4x2 vehicles with automatic and 3.0L or 4.0L V6 engine 9.5L (10.0 quarts)3 4x4 vehicles with automatic 9.8L (10.3 quarts) 3 Engine coolant 4 Premium Engine Coolant 2.5L I4 engine with manual transmission 10.0L (10.5 quarts) 2.5L I4 engine with automatic transmission 9.7L (10.2 quarts) 3.0L V6 engine with manual transmission 14.3L (15.1 quarts) 3.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission 14.0L (14.8 quarts) 4.0L V6 engine with manual transmission 13.0L (13.7 quarts) 4.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission 12.5L (13.2 quarts) Fuel tank N/A Regular cab (Short wheel base) 62.4L (16.5 gallons) Regular cab (Long wheel base) 75.7L (20.0 gallons) SuperCab 73.8L (19.5 gallons) Transfer Case Fluid Motorcraft MERCONt ATF 4x4 Vehicles 1.2L (1.25 quarts) Capacities and specifications 210
  • 211. Fluid Ford Part Name Capacities and specifications Application Capacity Front axle lubricant Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant 4x4 Vehicles 1.7L (3.6 pints) Rear axle lubricant5 Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant All 2.4-2.5L (5.0-5.3 pints) Windshield washer fluid Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate All 2.6L (2.75 quarts) 1 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine the correct service interval. 2 Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. 3 Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 4 Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant (green in color). DO NOT USE Ford Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in the Maintenance and Care chapter. 5 Traction-Lok axles use 2.2–2.4L (4.75–5.0 pints) of rear axle lubricant. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to 14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole. 211
  • 212. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Ford part name or equivalent Ford part number Ford specification Front axle (4X4) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A Rear axle Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant1 XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A Brake fluid and clutch fluid (if equipped) High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A and DOT 3 Door weather strips Silicone Lubricant F7AZ-19G208-BA ESR-M13P4-A Engine coolant Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) ESE-M97B44-A Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C153-G and API Certification Mark Hinges, door checks, latches, striker plates, fuel filler door hinge and seat tracks Multi-Purpose Grease DOAZ-19584-AA or F5AZ-19G209-AA ESB-M1C93-B or ESB-M1C159-A Capacities and specifications 212
  • 213. Item Capacities and specifications Ford part name or equivalent Ford part number Ford specification Transmission /steering/parking brake linkages and pivots, brake and clutch pedal shaft, clutch pilot bearing and. input shaft spline (manual transmission). Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75-B Power steering fluid, transfer case fluid (4X4) and transmission fluid (manual) Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QDX MERCONt Automatic transmission (4R44E, 5R44E and 5R55E) Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF 2 XT-5-QM MERCONtV Windshield washer fluid Ultra-clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 1 Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. 2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine the correct service interval. 213
  • 214. Capacities and specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 2.5L I4 engine 3.0L FFV V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine Cubic inches 153 182 245 Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane or Ethanol (E 85) 87 octane Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 Spark plug gap 1.07-1.17 mm (0.042-.046 inch) 1.07-1.17 mm (0.042-.046 inch) 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Ignition system EDIS EDIS EDIS Compression 9.4:1 9.14:1 9.0:1 ratio Engine 2.3L I4 engine 2.5L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine Cubic inches 138 153 182 245 Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane 87 octane 87 octane Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6 Spark plug gap 1.04-1.19mm (0.041-0.047 inch) 1.07-1.17mm (0.042-0.046 inch) 1.07-1.17mm (0.042-0.046 inch) 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Ignition system EDIS EDIS EDIS EDIS Compression ratio 9.7:1 9.4:1 9.14:1 9.0:1 214
  • 215. VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Vehicle dimensions Regular Cab Short Wheel Base (SWB) mm (in) Regular Cab Long Wheel Base (LWB) mm (in) Supercab mm (in) (1) Overall length 4 763 (187.5) 5 093 (200.5) 5 153 (202.9) (2) Overall width 1 785 (70.3) 1 785 (70.3) 1 785 (70.3) (3) Overall height 4x2/4x4 1 575 (62.0) / 1 655 (65.2) 1 586 (62.4) / 1 655 (65.2) 1 585 (62.4) / 1 684 (66.3) (4) Wheelbase 2 831 (111.4) 2 983 (117.4) 3 192 (125.7) (5) Track - 1 486 (58.5) 1 486 (58.5) 1 485 (58.5) Front (5) Track - Rear 1 455 (57.3) 1 455 (57.3) 1 455 (57.3) 5 2 3 Capacities and specifications 215
  • 217. Capacities and specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Certification label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification Label may be located. The Certification Label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side instrument panel. (Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.) MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A. DATE: XXXXX GVWR:XXXXX LB/ XXXXX KG FGAWR: XXXXXX/XXXXXXX RGAWR: XXXXXXX/XXXXXXX THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MAXIMUM LOAD=OCCUPANTS + LUGGAGE=XXXKG/XXXXLB OCCUPANTS: X TOTAL X FR X 2ND X RR OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE XX XXXKG/XXXXLB TIRE: XXXX/XXXXX XXX X XXXKG/XXXXLB PRESSURE (FR) XXX kPa/33 PSI COLD PRESSURE (RR) XXX kPa/33 PSI COLD TRAILER TOWING - SEE OWNER GUIDE EXT PNT: XXXXXX XXXXXX RC: XX DSO: XXXX F0000 BAR INT TR TP/PS R AXLE TR SPR T0000 X XX XXX X XX X XXXX UTC ÑFOHT-15294A10-GA XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Engine number The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and transfer case (if equipped). 217
  • 218. Customer assistance Ford Extended Service Plan You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides the following: ² benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and wear items) ² protection against repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln/ Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage. (In Hawaii, rules vary. See your dealer for details.) When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln/Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options. Getting the service you need At home Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. When you need warranty repairs your selling dealer would like you to return to it for that service, but you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you, then contact the Customer Assistance Center. 218
  • 219. Customer assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, please contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada dealerships also carry quality parts and accessories, providing you with equipment reliability. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Assistance Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) In Canada: Customer Assistance Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 219
  • 220. Customer assistance If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Assistance Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-521-4140 (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) In Canada: Customer Assistance Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Assistance Center: ² Your telephone number (home and business) ² The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located ² The year and make of your vehicle ² The date of vehicle purchase ² The current odometer reading ² The vehicle identification number (VIN) If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.) or the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada). In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This 220
  • 221. dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. only) The Dispute Settlement Board is: ² an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes ² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law. What kinds of cases does the Board review? Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance as designed concerns on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: ² a non-Ford product ² a non-Ford dealership ² sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as designed ² a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a service or product concern is being reviewed ² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) ² alleged personal injury/property damage claims ² cases currently in litigation ² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) ² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties Customer assistance 221
  • 222. Customer assistance Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. Board membership The Board consists of: ² three consumer representatives ² a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for their business leadership qualities. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return receipt requested. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: ² the file number assigned to your application ² the toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be asked to submit statements. To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: ² legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case ² the year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license ² the date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s) ² the current mileage ² the name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle ² a brief description of your unresolved concern 222
  • 223. Customer assistance ² a brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company ² the names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s) ² a description of the action you expect to resolve your concern You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not qualify for Board review. Oral presentations If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question #6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the case whether or not an oral presentation is made. Oral presentation may be requested by the Board as well. Making a decision Board members review all available information related to each complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to consider some cases. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law. To Request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the Board at the following address/phone number: Dispute Settlement Board P.O. Box 5120 Southfield, MI 48086–5120 1–800–428–3718 223
  • 224. Customer assistance You may also contact the North American Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by writing to the Center at the following address: Ford Motor Company Customer Assistance Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces, except Quebec. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or owner relations/customer assistance office. 224
  • 225. Customer assistance The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations. FORD CAR CARE PRODUCTS FOR YOUR VEHICLE Ford has many quality products available from your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials and that meet or exceed Ford’s rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or products of equivalent quality: Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 225
  • 226. Customer assistance Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Metal Surface Cleaner Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner* Motorcraft Car Wash Concentrate Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner Ford Spot and Stain Remover* Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing Ford Triple Clean Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) * May be sold with the Motorcraft name FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Ford accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. Ford accessories are warranted for up to 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) on all cars and light trucks and 12 months with unlimited distance on medium/heavy duty trucks unless the accessory is installed on a new vehicle, then the warranty becomes the balance of the new vehicle’s warranty or the accessories warranty, whichever is greater. See your dealer for complete warranty information and availability. Not all accessories are available for all models. 226
  • 227. Customer assistance Vehicle Security Styled wheel protector locks Vehicle security systems Comfort and convenience Cargo nets Cargo organizers Cargo shades (Super Cab only) Engine block heaters Manual sliding rear window Tire step Travel equipment Daytime running lights Fog lights Heavy-duty battery Pickup box rails Removable luggage rack Running boards Speed control Trailer hitch Trailer hitch bars and balls Trailer hitch wiring adaptor Protection and appearance equipment Air bag anti-theft locks Bed mat/bedliner tailgate covers Bed mats Bedliners Carpet floor mats Cleaners, waxes and polishes Front end covers (full and sport) 227
  • 228. Customer assistance Hood deflectors Locking gas cap Lubricants and oils Molded vinyl floor mats Side window air deflectors Spare tire lock Step bumpers Step/sill plates Tailgate protector Tonneau covers Touch-up paint Universal floor mats For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: ² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. ² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. ² Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may be damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) ² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. 228
  • 229. Customer assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio: Make checks payable to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07150 Detroit, Michigan 48207 For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST, for credit card holders only Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 229
  • 230. Reporting safety defects REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (202–366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street Washington D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 230
  • 231. Air bag supplemental restraint system ..........................84 and child safety seats ..............85 description ................................84 disposal ......................................88 driver air bag ............................86 indicator light ......................10,87 operation ...................................86 passenger air bag .....................86 passenger deactivation switch ..............25,88 Air cleaner filter .......................209 Air conditioning ..........................19 manual heating and air conditioning system .................21 Ambulance packages ....................3 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ................168 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) .......................107,108 Anti-theft system warning light .............................11 Audio system (see Radio) .........26 Automatic transmission ............111 driving an automatic overdrive ..........................112,114 fluid, adding ............................173 fluid, checking ........................173 fluid, refill capacities ..............209 fluid, specification ..................214 Auxiliary power point .................25 Axle lubricant specifications ...212,214 refill capacities ........................209 traction lok ..............................124 Battery .......................................178 acid, treating emergencies .....178 charging system warning light .............................11 jumping a disabled battery ....152 maintenance-free ....................178 replacement, specifications ...209 Index servicing ..................................178 voltage gauge ............................17 Belt minder .................................80 Brakes ........................................106 anti-lock .....................106,107,108 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ......................10,108 brake warning light ..................10 fluid, checking and adding ....166 fluid, refill capacities ..............209 fluid, specifications ..........212,214 lubricant specifications ...212,214 parking ....................................108 shift interlock ..........................111 Break-in period .............................2 Capacities for refilling fluids ....209 Cargo area shade ........................63 Cargo net .....................................63 Certification Label ....................217 Child safety restraints ................93 child safety belts ......................93 Child safety seats ........................94 attaching with tether straps ....99 in front seat ..............................96 in rear seat ................................96 tether anchorage hardware .....99 Cleaning your vehicle ...............203 engine compartment ..............204 exterior .............................204,207 exterior lamps .........................206 instrument panel ....................207 instrument panel lens ............207 interior .....................................207 mirrors .....................................208 plastic parts ............................206 safety belts ..............................207 washing ....................................203 waxing .....................................203 wheels ......................................204 windows ..................................208 wiper blades ............................206 231
  • 232. Climate control (see Air conditioning or Heating) ............19 Clock .............................29,36,42,51 Clutch fluid ..........................................167 operation while driving ..........116 recommended shift speeds ....118 Console ........................................63 Coolant checking and adding ..............168 refill capacities .................172,209 specifications ...................212,214 Cruise control (see Speed control) ....................55 Customer Assistance ................137 Ford accessories for your vehicle ......................225 Ford Extended Service Plan ............................218 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada .....................224 Getting roadside assistance ...137 Getting the service you need ....................218 Ordering additional owner’s literature ...................229 The Dispute Settlement Board ...................221 Utilizing the Mediation/ Arbitration Program ...............224 Daytime running lamps (see Lamps) ................................18 Dipstick automatic transmission fluid ...................173 engine oil .................................163 Doors door ajar warning .....................12 lubricant specifications ..........212 Driveline universal joint and slip yoke ....................177 Driving under special conditions ..............122,123 mud ..........................................122 sand .........................................122 snow and ice ...........................123 through water ..................122,124 Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................152 Emission control system ..........195 Engine .................................214,215 check engine/ service engine soon light ...........8 cleaning ...................................204 coolant .....................................168 idle speed control ...................178 lubrication specifications ...................212,214 refill capacities ........................209 service points ............160,161,162 starting after a collision .........138 Engine block heater .................104 Engine oil ..................................163 checking and adding ..............163 dipstick ....................................163 filter, specifications .........165,209 recommendations ...................165 refill capacities ........................209 specifications ...................212,214 Exhaust fumes ..........................105 Fluid capacities .........................209 Foglamps .....................................18 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles ..12,119 control trac ...............................24 description ..............................119 driving off road .......................121 electronic shift ...................24,119 indicator light .........................119 preparing to drive your vehicle .....................................110 Fuel ............................................186 calculating fuel economy .......192 cap ...........................................188 Index 232
  • 233. capacity ...................................209 choosing the right fuel ...........189 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates .................195 detergent in fuel .....................191 filling your vehicle with fuel ....................186,188,192 filter, specifications .........192,209 fuel pump shut-off switch .....138 gauge .........................................14 improving fuel economy ........192 octane rating .............190,214,215 quality ......................................190 running out of fuel .................191 safety information relating to automotive fuels .....................186 Fuses ...................................140,141 Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............188 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) .................192 Gauges .........................................14 battery voltage gauge ...............17 engine coolant temperature gauge ...................15 engine oil pressure gauge ........17 fuel gauge ..................................14 odometer ...................................16 speedometer .............................16 tachometer ................................15 trip odometer ............................16 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....125 calculating ...............................127 definition .................................125 driving with a heavy load ......125 location ....................................125 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .............125 calculating ........................125,127 definition .................................125 driving with a heavy load ......125 location ....................................125 Index Hazard flashers .........................138 Headlamps ...................................18 aiming ......................................202 bulb specifications ..................201 daytime running lights .............18 flash to pass ..............................19 high beam ............................11,18 replacing bulbs .......................197 turning on and off ....................18 warning chime ..........................13 Heating ........................................19 heater only system ...................19 Hood ..........................................159 Ignition ................................214,215 positions of the ignition ...........54 Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..94 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ........................................196 Instrument panel cleaning ...................................207 cluster ...................................8,207 lighting up panel and interior .....................19 location of components ..............8 Jump-starting your vehicle ......152 Keys key in ignition chime ...............13 positions of the ignition ...........54 Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart ................201 cargo lamps ...............................19 daytime running light ...............18 fog lamps ...................................18 headlamps .................................18 headlamps, flash to pass ..........19 instrument panel, dimming .....19 interior lamps .........................202 replacing bulbs ..197,199,200,201 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) ........................54 Lights, warning and indicator ......8 233
  • 234. air bag ........................................10 anti-lock brakes (ABS) .....10,108 anti-theft ...................................11 brake ..........................................10 charging system ........................11 check coolant ............................12 check engine ...............................8 cruise indicator .........................12 door ajar ....................................12 fuel reset ...................................10 high beam .................................11 overdrive off ..............................11 safety belt .................................10 speed control ............................59 turn signal indicator .................11 Load limits .................................125 GAWR ......................................125 GVWR ......................................125 trailer towing ..........................125 Loading instructions .................126 Lubricant specifications ....212,214 Lumbar support, seats ...............71 Manual transmission .................116 fluid capacities ........................209 lubricant specifications ..........214 reverse .....................................118 Mirrors cleaning ...................................208 side view mirrors (power) .......62 Motorcraft parts .................192,209 Octane rating ............................190 Odometer .....................................16 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................163 Overdrive .....................................59 Panic alarm feature, remote entry system ................................64 Parking brake ............................108 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....209 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ...............................144 Power door locks ........................62 Power steering ..........................109 fluid, checking and adding ....173 fluid, refill capacity ................209 fluid, specifications ..........212,214 Preparing to drive your vehicle .....................110 Radio ............................................26 Relays ........................................140 Remote entry system ............63,64 illuminated entry ......................67 locking/unlocking doors ...........64 panic alarm ...............................64 replacement/additional transmitters ...............................66 replacing the batteries .............65 Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ...........13,72,73,74,75,76 Safety defects, reporting ..........230 Safety restraints ......72,73,74,75,76 belt minder ...............................80 cleaning the safety belts ...83,207 extension assembly ..................79 for adults ....................73,74,75,76 for children ...............................93 lap belt ......................................78 warning light and chime ........................10,13,79 Safety seats for children ............94 Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ...............72 Seats ............................................70 child safety seats ......................94 SecuriLock passive anti-theft system ...............67,68,69 Servicing your vehicle ..............158 Snowplowing .................................3 Spark plugs, specifications ...............209,214,215 Special notice ................................3 ambulance conversions ..............3 utility-type vehicles ....................3 Specification chart, lubricants ............................212,214 Index 234
  • 235. Speed control ..............................55 Speedometer ...............................16 Starting your vehicle .........100,102 jump starting ..........................152 Steering wheel tilting .........................................60 Tachometer .................................15 Tires ......................147,181,182,183 changing ...........................147,150 checking the pressure ............183 replacing ..................................184 rotating ....................................183 snow tires and chains ............185 tire grades ...............................182 treadwear ................................182 Towing .......................................183 recreational towing .................136 wrecker ....................................157 Traction-lok rear axle ...............124 Transfer case fluid checking .........................177 Transmission automatic operation ...............111 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) .............................173 fluid, checking and adding (manual) .................................176 Index fluid, refill capacities ..............209 lubricant specifications ...212,214 manual operation ....................116 Trip odometer .............................16 Turn signal .............................11,54 Vehicle dimensions ...................215 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................217 Vehicle loading ..........................125 camper bodies ........................136 Ventilating your vehicle ...........105 Warning chimes ...........................13 Warning lights (see Lights) .........8 Washer fluid ..............................168 Water, Driving through .............124 Windows power .........................................61 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid .....168 checking and cleaning ............180 operation ...................................61 replacing wiper blades ...........181 Wrecker towing .........................157 235
  • 236. 236
  • 237. 237
  • 238. 238
  • 239. Filling station information Item Information Required fuel Refer to 9Octane recommendations9 in the Maintenance and care chapter. Fuel tank capacity (Regular cab-Short wheel base) 62.4L (16.5 gallons) Fuel tank capacity (Regular cab-Long wheel base) 75.7 (20.0 gallons) Fuel tank capacity (SuperCab) 73.8L (19.5 gallons) Engine oil capacity (includes filter change)-2.5L I4 and 3.0L V6 engines 4.3L (4.5 quarts). Use Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil, Ford specification WSS-M2C153-G. Engine oil capacity (includes filter change)-4.0L V6 engine 4.7L (5.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil, Ford specification WSS-M2C153-G. Tire size and pressure Refer to the Certification Label on inside of driver’s door. Hood release Pull handle under the left side of the instrument panel. Coolant capacity-2.5L I4 with manual transmission 1 10.0L (10.5 quarts) Coolant capacity-2.5L I4 with automatic transmission 1 9.7L (10.2 quarts) Coolant capacity-3.0L V6 with manual transmission 1 14.3L (15.1 quarts) Coolant capacity-3.0L V6 with automatic transmission 1 14.0L (14.8 quarts) Coolant capacity-4.0L V6 with manual transmission 1 13.0L (13.7 quarts) Coolant capacity-4.0L V6 with automatic transmission 1 12.5L (13.2 quarts) Power steering fluid capacity Fill to range on dipstick. Use Motorcraft MERCONt ATF. 239
  • 240. Filling station information Item Information Manual transmission fluid capacity 2.65L (2.8 quarts). Use Motorcraft MERCONt ATF. 2 Automatic transmission fluid capacity-4x2 vehicles with I4 engine 9.4L (9.9 quarts). Use Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 Automatic transmission fluid capacity-4x2 vehicles with V6 engine 9.5L (10.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 Automatic transmission fluid capacity-4x4 vehicles 9.8L (10.3 quarts). Use Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF. 2, 3 Windshield washer fluid 2.6L (2.75 quarts). Use Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate. 1 Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant (green in color). DO NOT USE Ford Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in the Maintenance and Care chapter. 2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine the correct service interval. 3 Approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Fluid level should be checked by a qualified service technician. 240